JP6501395B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a "slot machine").

  Conventionally, as seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game is performed in which a large amount of awards can be obtained when a winning is made.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening provided in the gaming area. Then, when there is a winning of the game ball to the starting opening, a determination process is performed in which a hit or the like is determined. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on a predetermined display for a predetermined fluctuation time. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode in which it is shown that the player wins the win, and the opening and closing member of the big winning opening is operated to increase the number of players. Provide a special game that can be won the award of.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is made to use the operation of the effect for presentation based on the result of the judgment on the hit. Through such effects, it is intended to improve the effect until the special game is performed.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-187791

However , with the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

  This invention is made in view of such a situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a decrease in amusement can be suppressed.

Means 1: A gaming machine in which a game is advanced based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Production moving body,
A moving object support portion on which the effect moving object is supported so as to be movable between a first position and a second position;
A biasing member for biasing the effect moving body toward the first position;
It is a force that tends to stay in place when the effect moving body is in a stationary state, and a force that causes the effect moving body to start moving when a force exceeding this force is applied to the effect moving body. Is “A”, the force applied to the first position by the biasing member is “B”, and the force of the direction component against the “B” of the force by the weight of the effect moving body When “C” represents “C”, “B” tends to increase as the effect moving body moves away from the first position and approaches the second position,
The effect moving body is
When the gaming machine is installed in a hall, it can be located anywhere in the middle movable range between the first position and the second position "A> | B-C |" The gaming machine characterized in that the following relationship is established and it is possible to stay on the spot.

  According to the present invention, a decrease in game interest can be suppressed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which abbreviate | omitted the left frame member and looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from lower side, (b) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). . (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the locking member in an outer frame. (A) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 1, (b) is sectional drawing which shows the state which opened the main body frame with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a). It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of a plate unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a saucer unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a rendering operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a rendering operation unit in the CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right rendering unit of the plate unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right rendering unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right rendering unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right rendering unit from the back. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right rendering unit of FIG.42 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right rendering unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right rendering unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right rendering unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing backward. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the upper countersinking unit of the countersink unit is attached to the countersink unit base, (b) is from behind with the upper countersink retractor mounted on the countersink unit base It is the seen perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper countersinking unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper countersinking unit, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower disc ball extraction unit of a disc unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower disc ball extraction unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member from the front and removed the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and was seen from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a payout device, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line E-E in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction path | pass by the ball extraction movable piece in a delivery apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which open | released the ball extraction path by the ball extraction movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the delivery blade | wing in a delivery apparatus. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball channel unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full tank path unit, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full ball channel unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball channel unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full-scale ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door has closed in the lower full tank path unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door is opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit. It is a right perspective view of a game board. It is a left perspective view of a game board. It is a rear view (perspective view) of a game board. They are a front view and sectional drawing of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game panel. Panel plate front view, sectional view, back view They are a front view, a sectional view, and a back view of center goods. It is a game panel front view, a guide outlet vicinity enlarged view, and a guide outlet vicinity sectional view. It is a front view of a back unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a back unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a back unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a back decoration unit. It is an expansion perspective view of a warp passage. It is an exploded perspective view of a front side character unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a back side thing unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a back side thing unit. It is a front view and a rear view. Back box + right side channel perspective view Right-handed flow diagram It is a disassembled perspective view of a liquid crystal drive unit. It is the front view and sectional view of the liquid crystal drive unit in the state where the upper liquid crystal display device is not moving. It is a perspective view of a liquid crystal drive unit in the state where the upper liquid crystal display has not moved. It is the front view and sectional drawing of the liquid crystal drive unit after the upper liquid crystal display device movement. It is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit after the upper liquid crystal display device movement. It is the front view and sectional view of the liquid crystal holding member in the state where the upper liquid crystal display device is not moving. It is a perspective view of the liquid crystal holding member in the state which the upper liquid crystal display device has not moved. It is the front view and sectional drawing of the liquid-crystal holding member after upper liquid crystal display device movement. It is a perspective view of the liquid-crystal holding member after upper liquid crystal display device movement. It is a figure which shows an example of the rotation effect of a liquid-crystal decoration member. It is a figure which shows the front view and rear view of a fuselage drive part. It is a figure which shows the perspective view of a fuselage drive part. It is a front view of a back unit in the state where a body drive part became visible. It is a figure explaining the hidden board attached to the back of a body drive part. It is a figure explaining the initial state of the movable decoration part of a body drive part. It is a figure explaining the state to which the movable decoration part of the body drive part advanced. It is a figure explaining the state where the movable decoration of a body drive part separated. It is a figure explaining the state which the movable decorative part of the fuselage drive part deformed (combined). It is a front view and a perspective view of the game board before the start of the effect. It is a front view and a perspective view of the game board in a state where the liquid crystal is open. It is a top view, a perspective view, a front view, and a side view of the trunk | drum drive part in the state of FIG. It is a front view and a perspective view of the game board in a state where the body has advanced. FIG. 124 is a plan view, a perspective view, a front view and a side view of the trunk drive unit in the state of FIG. 123. It is a front view and a perspective view of a game board in the state where parts of a body were separated. FIG. 126 is a plan view, a perspective view, a front view and a side view of the trunk drive unit in the state of FIG. 125. They are a front view and a perspective view of the state game board which the fuselage | body completed. FIG. 130 is a plan view, a perspective view, a front view and a side view of the trunk drive unit in the state of FIG. 127. It is a front view and a perspective view of a state game board where uniting is completed. It is a figure which shows an example of a main control board block diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of a periphery control board block diagram. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main control side power-on process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of special symbol / special electric motorized goods control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of special symbol change waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of special symbol variation pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of change pattern selection judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of processing at the time of peripheral control part power on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is a door frame for a pachinko machine, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit.

  The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, etc., an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend laterally, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which connect the both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view The outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 on the left end side in front view of the curtain plate member 50 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-like door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which has a square outer shape in a front view and which penetrates back and forth, and a front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100 A bowl unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left of the door frame base unit 100 The game ball stored through the unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish unit 200 through the front lower right portion of the door frame base unit 100 and stored in the upper plate 201 Handle unit 500 which can be operated by the player to drive the game board 5 into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear face of the door frame base unit 100. And the game cover of the upper tray 201 attached to the lower portion of the rear face of the door frame base unit 100, which receives the game ball which is accidentally dropped into the game area and discharged to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200. A ball feed unit 540 for feeding to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through hole 111, and a crime prevention cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 ing.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-like main frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base in a front view. , And the door Locking unit 700 for locking between 3 and main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player side A unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 openably and closably attached to the main frame base 600 And a back cover 980.

  Dispensing unit 800 of body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of body frame base 600 and attached to the top of dispensing unit base 801 and extends upward and leftwardly. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; Gaming balls which are detachably mounted on the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 The dispensing device 830 which dispenses one by one based on an instruction from the dispensing control substrate 951 (see FIG. 142) accommodated in the dispensing control substrate box 950, and is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing unit base 801 and dispensed by the dispensing device 830 An upper full-ball path unit 850 which guides the game ball downward and releases the game ball from either the normal release port or the full release port according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200. And a normal guiding path which is attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 and guides the gaming balls discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 from the front end. And there is a full tank induction route which guides gaming balls discharged from the full tank outlet forwardly to the full tank receptacle 530 of the door frame 3 from the front end. And a lower full sphere path unit 860, and a.

  The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the main body frame base 600 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass A speaker unit 920 having a 921. A power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls. And a delivery control board box 950. .

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a where the game ball is struck as shown in FIGS. A panel decoration 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding the game, a flat game panel 2000 attached to the rear side of the panel decoration 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a rear of the game panel 2000 With a box-like substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the side and opened upward, and a main control substrate 4100 attached to the back side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 Main control unit 1300, and a plurality of winning openings which can be installed in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 2000 and receive the game balls hit into the game area 5a. A table unit that (illustration is omitted), and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 2000 in the upper of the substrate holder 1200, the.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when the gaming ball driven into the game area 5a is received by the winning opening not shown, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 according to the accepted winning opening. . Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper tray 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a front view of an outer frame of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing an exploded view of (a) FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same surface. It is done.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10 and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60; An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is mounted on the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached at a position from the left to right center of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 And a flat right sliding member 82 mounted at a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 are engaged with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. , Equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. An upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached to the inside of the engagement notch 11. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is equipped with the mounting step part 12 which was depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a front view left end. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed in the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower lengths of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the lower frame member 20 are equal to those of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after the The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engagement notch 21 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 which is recessed rearward from the front surface of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded shape of a metal such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward between the position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end on the side surface that is the outside in the left-right direction. It has the convex recessed parts 31 and 41, and the protrusion parts 32 and 42 which bulged from the side surface on the opposite side of the recessed parts 31 and 41, and the inside is formed in the cavity. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the projecting portions 32 and 42, an upper left connecting member 85A, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface. A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. In addition, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end at the upper surface And a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left slide member 81 and the right slide member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although the illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 15 (b) and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. There is. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to insert the main frame 4 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a band-plate shaped lock main body 66a whose right and left extend with a predetermined width and an operation part projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, a resiliently deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending diagonally forward to the left after extending from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and an attachment hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member It extends forward so as to be in contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17).

  Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface in the vicinity of the front end of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a main frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main frame upper upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view by rotating the lock main body 66a in the direction in which the front end moves to the left by the operation of the operation portion 66b. Can be completely through. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontally extending flat horizontal portion 71 and the horizontal portion 71. A large plate 72 rising up, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 vertically penetrated so that only one game ball can pass And the discharge hole 74 of the The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape whose left side is a base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached at a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 to the left. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 rightward in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the front side of the projecting portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is inserted into the main frame lower lower hinge member (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, whereby the outer frame lower upper hinge pin 70 is inserted. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 matches the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. Specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game frame 4 from rolling to the rear side, the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 from the front and rear both sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided separately in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 and the projecting portions 32 and 42. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw which is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 and the projecting portions 32 and 42 and screwed from the outer side surface. It fixes to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 by this.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. .

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. FIG. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state where the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts on the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 The lock main body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip end portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, A space in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the supporting mechanism of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a The right side face of the lock body 66 is in close proximity to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side face of the front end of the lock main body 66a and the right hanging In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bending bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 63 are diagonally offset and opposed It is in the state.

  And, in this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin There is almost no load from 622 on the front end face of the locking member 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. In addition, since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in a circular arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is turned to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 is smoothly turned. There is. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the slope of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and abuts on the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force A component force F1 (a normal direction of an arc of a front end face of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arc shaped front end face, a body frame upper hinge pin 622 and a bearing groove 63 The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment that the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 rotates in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right does not work, and the hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is one of the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal pivotally supported state or a state where the action force of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  The front end portion of the lock main body 66a faces the front protrusion 62 at a position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 even if the shape of the front end face is not an arc. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at the position where the rotational moment to be rotated occurs, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even when the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, so the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper side of the main frame in the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63 Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 pivots around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is moved by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 is pivoted so that the front end of the arm moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can rotate at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.18 (a) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 1, (b) is sectional drawing which shows the state which opened the main body frame with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a).

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. Thus, it is possible to prevent a fraud from being conducted through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the incorrect tool in contact with the upper wall portion 54 is bent upward, the end of the incorrect tool by the return portion 55 Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from invading the rear side of the main body frame 4, and cheating is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably blocked.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When the gaming ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) in the state where it is, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 by the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 because it is not. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the right discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Since the left discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 etc. Between the game ball and the game ball can be reduced.

  Therefore, by the game ball being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged or the main frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 25. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the door frame. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a door frame base unit 100 having a frame-like outer shape in a front view, a plate unit 200 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100, and the front lower right of the door frame base unit 100 And a handle unit 500 mounted through the pan unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to the rear cover lower surface of the door frame base unit 100, the ball feed unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. And a crime prevention cover 580 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back direction; A tubular handle attachment member 120 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base 110 in front view and for attaching the handle unit 500, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. The door frame side attached to upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left side in the front view and projecting forward and rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  Although the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is vertically arranged in a row and bulges forward, and can store the game balls; an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202; A plate unit base 210 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 and an upper plate liquid crystal display 244 attached to the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and capable of displaying an image; On the right side of the top plate 201 in a front view, the effect operation unit 220 having the touch panel 246 and the top plate effect button 257 operable by the player, the plate unit cover 260 covering the top plate 201 and the bottom plate 202 from the front side A door lower right rendering unit 270 having a door lower right rotating body 270A arranged and rotating according to the gaming state is covered from the front side of the door lower right rendering unit 270 A transparent effect unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removing unit 310 for removing game balls stored in the upper plate 201 into the lower plate 202, and a device for removing gaming balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward. A lower plate ball draining unit 320, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, A top plate top decoration member 340 attached to the top of the tray unit base 210 and capable of emitting light is mainly provided.

  The top unit 350 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 etc., a unit base 360 having a part of which is translucent attached to the front side of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side; A translucent top decoration member 370 attached to the center of the right and left at the front of the 360 and bulging forward, and a top speaker mounted in the top decoration member 370 and outputting high-pitched sound ( A door frame upper decorative substrate 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof is provided.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 has a flat unit base 410 mounted along the left outer periphery of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front of the base 410 and having its upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 A left speaker unit 430 attached at a position to be the upper left corner of 3 and having a left speaker (not shown), and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 has a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer periphery of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front of the base 460 and having its upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame at the front of the right side decorative member 470 A right speaker unit 480 mounted at a position to be the upper right corner of 3 and having a right speaker (not shown), and mounted between the unit base 460 and the right side decoration member 470 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front And a door frame right decoration substrate (not shown) to which is attached.

  The handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle main body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle main body 502, as shown in FIGS. A handle lever 506 that can be pivoted by the player, and a handle cover 506 attached to the handle main body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and rotatably supporting the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle main body 502 And have. Further, although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle operation sensor 507 (see FIG. 142) mounted in the handle main body 502 and detecting the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and It includes a stop button which can be operated by the cage player, and a contact detection sensor 509 (see FIG. 142) attached to the inside of the handle main body 502 for detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504.

  As shown in FIG. 24, FIG. 25 and FIG. 54 to FIG. 56 etc., the fal cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-like unit main body attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and open on the front side. Main components 522 and a flat lid member 524 attached to the front of the unit body 522 are provided. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and connects the normal guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 to the upper countersink supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. And 526, a full tank receiving hole 528 that opens rearward at the right side in a front view of the through ball passage 526 and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full ball unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A ball that opens upward at the right side of the ball socket 528 in a front view and receives a game ball (far ball) that has not been reached into the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main frame 4 The ball receptacle 530 and the bowl unit 200 which is opened forward in the lower right corner in a front view and releases gaming balls received in the full ball receptacle 528 and the far ball receptacle 530. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  The ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542 and a box-like unit main body 542 which extends left and right and whose rear side is opened as shown in FIGS. The unit cover 544 removably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 in a box shape with the front side opened and in a front view right side of the fal cover unit 520, A ball entry port 546 to which gaming balls stored in 201 enter, a ball exit port 548 which can release game balls entering the ball entry port 546 and is opened toward the rear, a ball entrance The game ball which has entered into 546 can be discharged, and there is provided a ball discharge port 550 which is open toward the front below the ball entry port 546. Also, although not shown, the ball feeding unit 540 is a ball feeding solenoid 551 (see FIG. 142) for releasing game balls entering from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball outlet 548, and the ball entering And a switching mechanism for switching the game ball entering from the port 546 to either the ball outlet 548 side or the ball outlet 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and to both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562 as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 closing the inside of the frame of the cage unit frame 562.

[3-1. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 to 41. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. Fig.30 (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of a dish unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below.

  FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the top, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as viewed from the bottom. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as viewed from the bottom. 39 is a plan view of the pan unit, FIG. 40 is an enlarged sectional view of a part of the rendering operation unit in the B-B cross section in FIG. 39, and FIG. 41 is a rendering operation in the C-C cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Furthermore, FIG. 42 (a) is a front view of the door lower right rendering unit of the pan unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right rendering unit, and FIG. 43 (a) is the door lower right rendering unit It is the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. FIG. 44 is a D-D cross-sectional view of the door lower right rendering unit of FIG. 42 (b). FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of a rotating member internal unit of the door lower right rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating member internal unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 49 (a) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right rendering unit facing forward, and FIG. 49 (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing backward.

  FIG. 50 (a) is a perspective view as viewed from the front with the upper countersinking unit attached to the dish unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 50 (b) is attached the upper countersinking unit to the dish unit base It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the upper countersink unit taken apart from the front, and FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper countersink unit taken out from the rear. FIG. 53 (a) is a front perspective view of the lower countersinking unit of the tray unit, and FIG. 53 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower countersink unit taken apart and viewed from the front.

  The plate unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit 200 is disposed from the upper plate 201 below the upper plate 201 and stores the game balls which are paid out from the payout device 830 and which hold gaming balls for hitting into the game area 5a. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing a ball. Further, the plate unit 200 is attached to the flat plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and to the upper front of the plate unit base 210, and the left side is greatly expanded forward from the left and right center. And a lower plate main body 214 attached to the left and right center at the lower front of the plate unit base 210 and bulging forward largely to form the lower plate 202. .

  Further, the pan unit 200 covers the front and bottom sides of the rendering operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper pan body 212 and the front surface of the pan unit base 210, the upper pan body 212, the lower pan body 214, and the rendering operation unit. A tray unit cover 260 attached to the front of the tray unit base 210, a door lower right rendering unit 270 disposed on the right side of the rendering operation unit 220 and mounted to the front right portion of the tray unit base 210, a door lower right rendering unit A game unit cover 300 attached to the front of the tray unit base 210 covering the front side of the 270 and the gaming ball attached so as to sandwich the tray unit base 210 from the front and back and stored in the upper tray 201 of the upper tray main body 212 And the lower tray body 214 below the lower tray body 214. Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Furthermore, the bowl unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 220, and a bowl rental operation unit 330 for operating a bowl rental machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the gaming hall, It is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210, and it is attached to the light-decorable top tray top decoration member 340 and the front left side of the tray unit base 210 behind the tray unit cover 260 and can emit light forward. The unit is attached to the front right side of the dish unit base 210 behind the dish unit left decoration substrate 345 provided with a plurality of LEDs, behind the effect unit cover 300 and below the door lower right effect unit 270, and facing forward Dish unit right decoration board 346 equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light, and mounted on the back side of the dish unit base 210 An upper dish front decoration board 233, an upper dish back decoration board 235, an upper dish liquid crystal board 241, an excitation device 242, a touch panel 246, an effect button decoration board 251, an effect button press sensor 258, a door lower right relay board 281, A dish unit left decorative board 345, and a dish unit relay board 347 relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and the peripheral control board 4140 (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

3-1a. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 210 of the plate unit 200 extends laterally to the entire width of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. The pan unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan and ball supply port 210a and extends in a cylindrical shape extending backward. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, a lower circular sphere feed port 210c penetrating longitudinally in the lower part in the left and right center of the front view and cylindrically extending backward, The ball feeding port 210c is provided with an upper flat ball feed port 210d which penetrates forward and backward in a front view upper right side of the ball feed port 210c and extends vertically and whose upper portion is positioned at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 210 is a through hole 210e having a square inner periphery penetrating in the front and rear direction on the left side in a front view of the upper plate ball feed port 210d, and a receiving plate projecting forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e. Piece 210f, relief hole 210g penetrating back and forth in front right upper side of upper flat ball feed port 210d, and front and back in front right lower corner of front view and handle attachment member 120 of door frame base unit 100 is inserted Handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i which is penetrated back and forth near the front right corner and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a right side front view of a cylindrical lower circular sphere supply port 210c And a notch 210j which is cut away from the rear end to the front in the side surface of the frame.

[3-1 b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, is formed in the shape of a container which is greatly expanded forward on the left side than the center in the left and right in a front view. ing. The upper tray main body 212 is open only to the left and the rear on the right end side in a front view, and includes a guiding passage 212a through which the game balls can flow. The upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the bottom surface is entirely lower at the right end. More specifically, with the upper tray body 212 attached to the tray unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is from the lower position of the upper bowl ball supply port 210a to the gaming ball from the upper end of the upper bowl ball feed port 210d. It is inclined to be lower towards the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thus, the game balls discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate main body 212, and the received game balls are received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed port 210d.

  Further, the upper plate main body 212 is provided with a metal ground fitting 212b which extends from the center on the left and right sides to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the grounding metal 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and when the gaming balls are in contact, static electricity charged on the gaming balls can be removed.

[3-1 c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower tray body 214 of the tray unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in a plan view with a rear end side longer than the front end side, and is formed in a container shape opened upward and rearward. The lower bowl body 214 has a ball removal hole 214a which penetrates up and down at the bottom and can be closed by the lower bowl ball removal unit 320, and the bottom is inclined to become lower toward the ball removal hole 214a. doing. The lower dish main body 214 can receive and store gaming balls discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 210c of the dish unit base 210, and makes the gaming balls downward of the dish unit 200 from the ball extraction holes 214a. It can be discharged.

[3-1 d. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish main body 212 at the center in the left and right front view, and the attachment base unit 220A. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the mounting base unit 220A on the left side in a front view of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A The unit cover 224 is attached to the mounting base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from the upper side, and the decoration member 226 attached to the right end of the mounting base unit 220A in front view.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire periphery at the center in the axial direction on the outer peripheral surface. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is formed of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side by alleviating the impact when the touch unit 220B is hit, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It can reduce that the vibration by the vibration excitation apparatus 242 is transmitted to the attachment base unit 220A or the plate unit base 210 side.

[3-1 d-1. Mounting base unit]
The mounting base unit 220A of the rendering operation unit 220 is, as shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 attached to the front of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and above the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 attached at the front end of the upper tray main body 212 and being open at the upper end capable of accommodating the touch unit 200B from the upper side and a horizontally long upper tray attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover which covers the front side of the upper plate front lens member 232 and the upper plate front decoration substrate 233 disposed between the front lens member 232, the upper plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and having a plurality of LEDs at the front surface And 240. A translucent upper-dish front decoration member 234 attached to 224.

  The mounting base unit 220A is attached to the rear end of the unit case 231, and is provided with a plurality of LEDs for emitting light upward, and a decoration substrate 235 for upper dish and an upper side of the decoration board 235 for upper dish. Between the upper plate rear decorative member 236 having a light transmitting property disposed on the unit cover 224 and the upper plate rear decorative member 236 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 And a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side in a front view of the upper back decoration member 236, and a button attachment member. And an upper disc ball release button 239 slidably mounted up and down by 238.

  The mounting base 230 is a flat-plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a which is inclined downward from the approximate center of the front to the front, and the mounting side receiving portion 230a penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a. And a cylindrical cylindrical receiving portion 230c extending downward from the peripheral edge of the through hole 230b. The through hole 230 b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed as it goes downward (see FIG. 41). More specifically, in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the front inner circumferential wall extends substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and the rear inner circumferential wall is below the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. It inclines and extends forward as it goes to the other side. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes forward and backward from the accommodation recess 231a capable of accommodating the touch unit 220B and the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view from the front to the left and the other in a cylindrical shape. The horizontal support pin 231b, and a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a at right and left, and from the left and right center of the bottom of the housing recess 231a It has a central support projection 231d projecting upward, and two receiving projections 231e projecting in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a and separated to the left and right. .

  The unit case 231 is vertically and circularly penetrated vertically on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower portion of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit attachment portion 231g for attaching the button unit 220C, a linear light emitting portion 237b of a linear light emitting lens member 237 extending downward from the upper end and extending laterally from the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the accommodation recess 231a And a notch portion 231h.

  The housing concave portion 231a of the unit case 231 is formed in a shape in which a shape in plan view is a combination of a square extending in the left and right direction and a trapezoid protruding outward from both left and right sides of the square. Further, the bottom of the square portion of the housing recess 231a is formed lower than the bottom of the trapezoidal portion of the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a is formed slightly lower than the height (the length in the axial direction) of the damper 222.

  The four horizontal support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a, and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. In addition, the horizontal support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i at the upper end side, the diameter of which decreases toward the upper end side (see FIG. 40). The distance between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a and the middle of the tapered portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length of the horizontal support pin 231 b is longer than that of the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c is insertable into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than a half length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving protrusion 231 e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231 e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230 b of the mounting base 230. In the receiving protrusion 231e, the outer peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and the outer peripheral wall on the rear side is inclined forward toward the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. It extends. Further, the receiving projection 231e is extended so that the outer peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. The lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 230 in the assembled state, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The upper front decoration member 234 exposes the front to the outside when the lower unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish and rear decoration substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for emitting and decorating the upper dish and rear decoration member 236, and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer in the left and right than the upper dish rear decoration member 236, and the light receiving section 237a disposed on the upper side of the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish rear decoration substrate 235; And a flat linear light emitting portion 237b fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231 in a continuous manner. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the accommodation recess 231a by fitting the linear light emitting portion 237b into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, and guides the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b to make the linear light emitting unit 237b The entire top end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper disc ball release button 239 is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the button attachment member 238, and includes an extension piece 239a which extends downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 respectively inserted into the four horizontal support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c. In addition, the outer peripheral surfaces of two receiving protrusions 231e protruding downward of the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and the mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the cylindrical receiving portion and the inner peripheral surface of the receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220 B side acts, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230 a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the recess 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent and transmitted to the mounting base 230 by the bending.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface inclined with respect to the surface (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B) on which they are formed. Because the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving protrusion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. Do. As a result, the force from the side of the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) is dispersed, and it is possible to prevent the large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. .

3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the touch unit 220B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-like lower case 240 whose upper side is opened, and an upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 attached from the upper side in the lower case 240. The upper case is attached to the lower case 240 while covering the upper sides of a pair of vibration devices 242, the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 disposed in the lower case 240 outside the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 A shallow box-like base member 243, an upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 inserted from the upper side in the base member 243 and capable of displaying an image under control of the upper-dish liquid crystal substrate 241; A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the top surface of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In the state where the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 are assembled, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 at their rear end surfaces. It has a waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 which extends over substantially the entire length of the rear end surface of the case 240 etc. ing.

  The outer case of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the accommodation recess 213 a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be accommodated in the accommodation recess 213 a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular substrate attachment portion 240 a extending in the left and right direction, a flat plate-like projection 240 b projecting in a trapezoidal shape from both left and right sides of the substrate attachment portion 240 a, and the projection 240 b. And a pair of damper mounting recesses 240c which are vertically penetrated in the same inner shape and which are partially opened to the outside in the left and right direction and spaced apart back and forth and projecting from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c The vibration device mounting portion 240e is disposed between the flange portion 240d and the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting portion 240b, and is disposed closer to the substrate mounting portion 240a and to which the vibration generating device 242 is mounted.

  The damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C-shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C-shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240 d is insertable into the groove 222 a of the damper 222.

  The excitation device 242 includes a small excitation drive motor 242 a and a weight 242 b attached with the center of gravity eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft of the excitation drive motor 242 a. The vibration generator 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242 b by the vibration drive motor 242 a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243 a formed in a shallow box shape by inserting the upper-tray liquid crystal display device 244 from the upper side, and extending portions 243 b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243 a. A screw hole 243c which penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip end of the extending portion 243b and formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c And a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 40) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 allows the distal end side to pass through the tapered portion 231i of the horizontal support pin 231b in the unit case 231, and the proximal end (lower side) than the tapered portion 231i It is formed in the size which can not pass.

  The touch panel 246 is provided with a tempered glass which is resistant to breakage due to impact, a capacitive sensor transparent sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover covering the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The damper 222 can be attached to the touch unit 220B by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C character into the damper attachment recess 240c provided on the left and right of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. As a result, axial movement of the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240 c is restricted. When the damper 222 is attached to the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Stand out.

  Further, in the touch unit 220 B, the excitation drive motor 242 a of the pair of excitation devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of excitation devices 242 can generate vibrations independently of each other.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image of a button or the like is displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has the prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when the liquid such as a drink is spilled on the plate unit 200, the liquid may enter the touch unit 220B. Thus, the touch unit 220B can be prevented from being damaged by the infiltration of liquid.

3-1d-3. Button unit]
The button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 is, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, a cylindrical unit body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the attachment base unit 220A and the lower portion of the unit body 250. A presentation button decoration substrate 251 disposed on the side and provided with LEDs on the top surface, and a substrate cover 252 covering the bottom side of the presentation button decoration substrate 251 and attached to the bottom side of the unit body 250 are provided.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, with the button base 253 being inserted between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250. A spring member 254 for urging the light guide member 255, a light guide member 255 which is inserted into the button base 253 and can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute members arranged above the light guide member 255 Sheet-like diffusion lens member 256 having a prism, an upper plate effect button 257 having a light transmitting property that covers the upper side of the diffusion lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the top surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button press sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end.

  The unit body 250 extends outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface, and has three attachment pieces 250a attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface , And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 has a cylindrical lower cylindrical portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical cylindrical upper cylindrical portion 253b whose diameter increases in the upward direction from the upper end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a, and an upper portion A claw which extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and whose lower end is capable of penetrating the through hole 250c of the unit main body 250 and which can be projected outward from the lower end and can be engaged (contacted) with the lower surface of the unit main body 250 A pair of engaging claws 253c having a pair of pins and radially outwardly projecting shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b, and the lower end can contact the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250 A plurality of flat contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e extending outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower cylindrical portion 253a and the upper cylindrical portion 253b and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as shown. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by the plurality of contact pieces 253 d of the button base 253.

  The light guiding member 255 extends from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a of the button base 253 from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a. And a plurality of cylindrical light guides 255b. The plurality of light guiding parts 255b are provided to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide light from the LEDs and emit the light from the entire top surface of the main part 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusion lens member 256, and the upper dish effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they may slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. In the button base 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper dish effect button 257 projects upward than the upper end of the unit body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 By engaging with the lower surface 250, the further rise is regulated, and the upper dish effect button 257 or the like is positioned at the rising end.

  When the upper dish effect button 257 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring member 254, the upper dish effect button 257 etc. is lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button press sensor 258. A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper dish effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 are in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted. The upper dish effect button 257 or the like is positioned at the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220C can emit light and decorate the upper dish effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 to emit light. The LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251 are full color LEDs, and the upper dish effect buttons 257 can be lighted and decorated in various colors.

3-1d-4. Characteristics of Production Operation Unit]
In the effect operation unit 220 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B in the assembled state is from the lower surface of the lower case 240 Also, since it protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and the touch unit 220B is moved upward relative to the horizontal support pins 231b. The movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. The tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the horizontal support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted in the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a on the side of the horizontal support pin 231b. It projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240 and the lower surface of the case 240. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on the left and right sides.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 220 tapers downward in the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached from the upper side in the pyramidal cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c that narrows downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the whole pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in the normal state, only the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the mounting base 230 in a state where the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the accommodation recess 231a) floats in the air.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30 etc., in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear (along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B). Striped). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting part 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, on the right side in a front view of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, an upper plate ball withdrawal button 239 is disposed. Furthermore, the button unit 220C is disposed on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the gaming state which is changed by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and enjoyed.

  An image imitating the operation button is displayed as the image displayed on the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, and the detection of the touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be accepted to allow the player to receive the image. The operation button can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a floating state from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the game state. It can be vibrated. In the effect using the touch panel 246, the vibration of the touch panel 246 (the touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration generator 242 so that the finger of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246 vibrates the touch panel 246. Even if the player operates the image operation button to the player, the player can be surprised as though the user operates the operation button having a substantial effect, and can be surprised by the touch panel 246 and the effect by the vibration. Can be entertained to the player to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view, the player is allowed to press the upper plate effect button 257 in accordance with the game state. You can enjoy the operation. More specifically, the image operation button on the touch panel 246 is a touch only on the touch panel 246, and there is a dislike that it lacks the feeling of operation compared to the actual operation button. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 without giving a sense of discomfort to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game .

  Since this effect operation unit 220 is disposed at the portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game is performed even during the effect other than using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a floating state from the lower unit case 231, even if the touch unit 220B is struck from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The force can absorb the impact to some extent. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or the like and an impact (load) is applied from above, the left and right horizontal support pins 231b are transmitted to the inserted dampers 222, and the touch unit 220B is lowered while the dampers 222 are lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Then, when the touch unit 220B is further lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 abuts on the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 being compressed is compressed downward. Thus, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B abuts on the left and right bottom surfaces of the accommodation recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without the intervention of the plurality of dampers 222.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the load from the central support protrusion 231d causes the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 to bend so that the center thereof moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a. When the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is bent, the pair of receiving protrusions 231e which project downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving protrusion 231e is further lowered by an impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B An impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  The outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are formed in the shape of a pyramid which is respectively narrowed downward, so from the receiving protrusion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side) The load to be transmitted is distributed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230 a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, by the number of layers of structures that absorb the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. Thus, the touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230, and the like can be less likely to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 220 is a linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the rear peripheral edge of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper dish rear decorative substrate 235 according to the gaming state The top end of 237 b can emit light linearly. Thereby, the interest of the player can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, according to the game state, the decoration light up decoration member 236 which is arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (rear side than the linear light emitting portion 237b) by the decoration LED 235a of the decoration back light board 235 be able to. By making the upper back decoration member 236 emit light and decoration, as with the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237, the player's interest is attracted to the rendering operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B. It is possible to enjoy the effects presented by the effect operation unit 220 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is covered by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. And a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows downward (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262) of the upper plate 201. Thus, it is possible to prevent the dew condensation water from intruding into the touch unit 220B, and to prevent a malfunction from occurring in the touch unit 220B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, It is possible to prevent a problem such as short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 without being exposed to the water droplets condensed by the upper plate 201.

[3-1 e. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 extends laterally as shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 and is formed in a shell-like shape with the centers at the left and right bulging forward and being opened rearward. . The pan unit cover 260 opens forward substantially at the center between the left and right, and has a lower pan opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the pan unit base 210 and a top plate side (upper side) in the inner peripheral wall of the lower pan opening 261 And a lower cover portion 262 covering the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220, and a bass of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 disposed on the left side in front view of the lower plate opening 261 The speaker grill 263 for transmitting the sound from the speakers, the plate unit left decoration member 264 disposed above the speaker grill 263 and illuminated by the plate unit left decoration substrate 345 and disposed on the right side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view And the bottom of the dish unit cover 260 is formed by the handle port 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  The lower plate opening portion 261 is closed by the lower plate main body 214 on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner circumferential wall. The speaker grille 263 and the plate unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal provided with a plurality of holes in a metal plate.

  The surface of the plate unit cover 260 is formed to have a smooth surface on the left side in a front view, while the surface on the right side is formed to have a rough surface. In addition, the right side in the front view has a light transmitting property substantially entirely.

  The plate unit cover 260 is formed in an assembled state with the plate unit 200 such that an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 can be held by one hand. Thus, when the player performs touch operation on the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and touch operation on the touch unit 220B is performed. Can be done easily.

  More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the front end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the rear end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the lower pan covering part 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined at about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Thus, the player can grasp between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper tray lower covering portion 262 with the hand of the player.

[3-1 f. Door lower right production unit]
The door lower right rendering unit 270 of the plate unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and to the right of the rendering operation unit 200 as shown in FIGS. 42 to 49, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotating body 270A for emitting light is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the relief opening 210g, and is attached to the unit base 271 rotatably supporting the door lower right rotating body 270A A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 engaged with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotary body 270A, a follower And a shaft member 275 rotatably supporting the gear 274 and attached to the unit base 271.

  In addition, the door lower right rendering unit 270 is mounted on the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A to the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271. A base-side bearing member 277 rotatably supporting the opposite side of the rotating body 270A with the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271 and a rotation of the door lower right-handed rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271 Two rotation detection sensors 278 that can detect the position, a decoration member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side in a front view of the door lower right rotation body 270A, and a back side of the unit base 271 A door lower right base decoration substrate 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271 Detection sensor 278, and a door bottom right base decorated substrate 280 door bottom right relay board 281 that relays the connection between the door bottom right rotator decorative substrate 291 and the peripheral control board 4140 and later, and.

  The door lower right rotation body 270A constitutes an outer shell, and each is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 in a hemispherical shell shape, and the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 And a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are respectively formed with semicircular notches 285a and 286a around the rotation axis. The front shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical shell-like surface, a band decoration 285 b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285 b The heart of the decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286 b having metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction in a band shape on the translucent hemispherical shell-like surface. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285 b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286 b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the rotating body internal unit 290 has a disk shape and is provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower rotating body decorative substrate 291 and the center of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 A cylindrical first fixed shaft member 292, which is attached to the bottom right side of the door lower right rotation body decorative substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 A cylindrical shape which is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277 And a second fixed shaft member 293. Although illustration is omitted, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay substrate 281 and the door lower right rotator decorative substrate 291 is inserted in the second fixed shaft member 293.

  In addition, the rotating body internal unit 290 is a flat, annular transparent reflector base 294 disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 and attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. And an annular, axially outwardly opened first reflector 295 mounted on the reflector base 294 and a reflector base 294 mounted inside the annular ring of the first reflector 295 to the center and having a hexagonal shape And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat ribs.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296, Relatively rotatable, they are separated from each other.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape forward from the front right upper portion with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a arranged on the rear side of the door lower right rotation body 270A and the ring portion 271a Of the first projecting piece 271b projecting in the second direction, and a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a plate shape forward from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip end of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape toward the rear from the front end.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft passes through. The driven gear 274 is formed larger in diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes an attachment portion 275a attached to the front end of the first projecting piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b which protrudes from the attachment portion 275a in a cylindrical shape. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotor-side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat detection piece 276b extending outward. The base bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271 c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271 d of the front end of the second projecting piece 271 c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second projecting piece 271 c symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis of the door lower right rotation body 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have rotational positions where the heart decoration 285c of the door lower right rotation body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 49A) and rotational positions where the heart decoration 285c faces backward (FIG. 49B) Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 of this embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 according to the game state, and stops so that the heart decoration 285c faces the front. It is possible to indicate to the player the arrival of a chance or the like depending on whether or not the player is entertained and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A is non-rotatably attached to the door lower right rendering unit 270, the door right right while the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates When the lower rotary body decorative substrate 291 (of the LED) emits light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotary body decorative substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotary body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 or the first reflector 295 Since the direction of the light reflected and induced by the two reflectors 296 changes, the light emitting decoration of the door lower right rotating body 270A is lit as if the light is blinking even if the LED of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 is not blinked The door lower right rotation body 270A can be made to emit light in a rainbow color by being made to emit light of various colors from the LED, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the effect unit cover 300 of the pan unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotary body cover portion 301 covering the front side of the spherical door lower right rotary body 270A in the door lower right staging unit 270. The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotary body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side in a front view of the plate unit cover 260 and penetrating in the front and rear in the lower right side of the rotary body cover portion 301 And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The effect unit cover 300 is in the form of a container whose back is open as a whole, and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is decorated with light emission by the door lower right base decoration substrate 280 of the door lower right effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is the dish unit right decoration substrate 346 Embellished by

[3-1 h. Upper bowl balling unit]
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the upper bowl / balloon removing unit 310 of the bowl unit 200 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the bowl unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an insertion opening 311a in the upper part of which the extension piece 239a of the upper countersink ball release button 239 can be inserted at the upper part thereof, and a through hole 210e of the tray unit base 210 in the cover 311 A front base member 312 attached at a position on the upper left of the front view, a press transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and pivoted by pressing of the upper disc ball release button 239, and a press transmission member And 313 a first spring member 314 which biases the upper disc ball release button 239 in the upward direction.

  Further, the upper disc ball removing unit 310 is provided with a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the disc unit base 210 so as to close the upper disc ball feed port 210d of the disc unit base 210 from the rear side; An upper disc ball withdrawal slider 316 disposed between the disc unit base 210 and the disc unit base 210 and mounted so as to be vertically movable by the rear base member 315 and in contact with the pressure transmitting member 313 from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 biasing the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel to the front surface of the pan unit base 210, and has a flat base 312a attached to the cover 311, and a pair of extended flats extending forward from the left and right sides of the base 312a. It is provided in the vicinity of the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmitting member 313 has a horizontally elongated cylindrical shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rear extension extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape An upper extension piece 313c which extends in a flat plate shape upward from near the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper disc ball release button 239 And a lower extending piece 313d extending downward in a flat plate shape from the right end in the front view on the lower surface of the rear extending piece 313b, and a downward direction from the lower side near the left end in the front view in the shaft portion 313a And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extending piece 313 d is formed in a triangular shape extending downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper countersink slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends flatly in parallel to the rear surface of the pan unit base 210, and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the pan unit base 210, and is separately provided on the front surface of the base portion 315a The slider support portion 315b slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and the front end of the plate unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a is opened forward at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper bowl ball feed port 210d. It has an upper entrance 315c which opens downward on the rear side of the base part 315a and through which gaming balls can flow.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 extends downward continuously with the upper inlet 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a and is open rearward and has a lower end curved in the rear direction, and An L-shaped second induction passage 315e which extends downward from the lower side of the first induction passage 315d and extends leftward in a front view and whose left end is opened leftward and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat channel lid 315f closing the rear end side of the left extending portion of the induction path 315e and the L-shaped second induction path 315e. An opening 315g is provided, and a spring locking portion 315h protruding in a boss shape forward from the front surface of the base 315a and to which the upper end of the second spring member 317 is locked.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined so that the left-side extending portion becomes lower toward the left. The left end of the second induction passage 315e is, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), inserted into the notch 210j of the cylindrical lower bowl ball supply port 210c in the plate unit base 210, and the second induction passage 315e and The lower flat ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper disc ball removal slider 316 is a flat plate having a slider base 316a slidably supported at the left and right ends on the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left to the front from the front view center at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b capable of contacting the lower end of the downward extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313 with the upper surface of the receiving piece 210f extending through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and the slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward as it goes downward from the rear side of the base 316a, and a hook-shaped spring engagement that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and the lower end of the second spring member 317 is locked. And a stop portion 316d.

  In the upper tray bowling unit 310, when the tray unit 200 is assembled, the upper inlet 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper tray main body 212. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 540 from the upper inlet 315 c via the first guiding portion 315 d on the rear side of the base portion 315 a.

  Further, when the upper disc ball extracting button 239 is pressed downward, the push transmitting member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extension piece 239 a of the upper disc ball extracting button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d pivots in the direction of moving downward about the shaft portion 313a. When the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressing transmission member 313, the upper flat ball withdrawal slider 316's transmission piece 316b with which the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d abuts. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper ball ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316 c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315 d side is in communication with the second guide path 315 e side. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 210c to the lower tray 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first induction passage 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second induction passage 315e. , The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  In addition, when the downward pressing of the upper disc ball releasing button 239 is released, the upper disc ball extracting slider 316 and the upper disc ball removing button 239 are raised by the biasing force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. It is possible to return to the original state.

[3-1 i. Lower bowl balling unit]
As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the lower countersink removing unit 320 of the tray unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower tray main body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the tray unit cover 260. A flat-plate-shaped lower-disc spherical-extraction base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the extraction hole 214a, and a flat-plate-shaped slide lid 322 which can slide over the lower-disc spherical-extraction base 321 to close the opening 321a. , A knob attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed from the front of the plate unit cover 260 to the outside, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in the direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324, and a holding device 325 for holding the slide lid 322 in the position opening the opening 321a against the biasing force of the spring member 324; It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower countersinking base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By mounting the lower tray ball removal base 321 to the lower plate main body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported to the left and right between the lower plate ball removal base 321 and the lower plate main body 212. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322 a held by the holding device 325 on the left end side in a front view.

  The holding device 325 is provided with a main body 325a attached to the lower ball ball withdrawal base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b which can be opened and closed from the main body 325a and can grip the holding projection 322a. The holding device 325 inserts the holding projection 322a between the pair of open holding claws 325a and presses the holding projection 322a toward the main body 325a, thereby closing the pair of holding claws 325b and holding the holding projections 322a. The claws 325b are kept closed. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved to the main body 325a side, the pair of holding claws 325a is opened, and the holding of the holding projection 322a is released.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 320, the slide lid 322 is located between the opening 321a and the lower hole body 214a of the lower plate main body 214 in a state where the picker 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in front view. The gaming balls in the lower tray 202 can be stored in the lower tray 202 without being dropped downward from the ball removal holes 214 a.

  From this state, by operating the knob portion 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a communicate. As a result, the gaming balls in the lower tray 202 come out of the lower portion of the tray unit 200 through the ball holes 214a and the opening 321a, and the gaming balls in the lower tray 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even if the operation of the knob portion 323 is stopped. You can keep pulling out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide cover 322, slightly operating the knob 323 to the left opens the pair of holding claws 325b and releases the holding projections 322a, and the biasing force of the spring member 324 slides the slide cover 322 to the right. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. As described above, by operating the knob portion 323 of the lower ball ball emptying unit 320, the gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate 202, or the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 can be removed.

[3-1 j. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200 is, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, etc., a unit case 331 attached to the upper surface near the right end in front view in the rendering operation unit 220 and translucent. A ball lending button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player, and a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and operable by the player; And a display section 334 which can be viewed from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 inserts a predetermined number of gaming balls into a bowl unit by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the ball lending button 332. 200 can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the remaining amount of the rented portion is subtracted and the cash remainder or prepaid card inserted is returned. Further, the display unit 334 displays the number of remaining cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, and the like.

[3-1 k. Upper plate top decoration member]
The upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, etc., attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a translucent upper dish top lens An upper plate top decorative substrate 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decorative member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band by causing the LEDs of the upper dish top decorative substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper dish top decorative member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper dish top decorative member is the same as the light emitting decoration such as the upper dish rear decoration member 236 and the linear luminous lens member 237 By making the light emitting decoration 340 possible, the player's interest can be attracted to the rendering operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the rendering operation unit 220 is enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest be able to.

[3-1 l. Characteristic effects of dish unit]
The dish unit 200 of this embodiment is a game ball within the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When displaying an image on the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 in accordance with the gaming state changing by typing in, the upper dish liquid-crystal display 244 has a strip shape along the outer peripheral edge on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish rear decoration member 236, and the upper dish top decoration member 340 can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) Light from the outside of the linear luminous lens member 237 etc. entering from the outside, and attracts the line of sight (interest) of the player to the linear luminous lens member 237 etc. Can. Therefore, when presenting effects such as an image according to the game state in the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emission lens member 237 or the like is made to emit light, thereby providing the player with the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and it is possible to enjoy the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of a chance, it is arranged outside the gaming area 5a. Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 being played, it is possible for the player to play the game in the game area 5a and the effect by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. And both can be bothered. Therefore, by giving attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (upper dish liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed, and when displaying an image indicating the arrival of a chance on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the player can be made to the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 by making the linear light emitting lens member 237 emit light. It is possible to make the player pay attention and to surely recognize the arrival of the chance to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, there is a risk that the player will not be able to concentrate on either of the gaming area 5a and the gaming area 5a, and may decrease interest, but the gaming state Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light according to the arrival), the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the light emission and the game within the game area 5a is enjoyed As the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened and tired.

  In addition, since the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the dish unit 200 which bulges to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 can be easily concealed by the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 becomes difficult to see from other players behind and behind The effect presented by the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and decrease in interest by being scolded by another player when enjoying the effects by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and it is also possible to reduce the upper plate liquid crystal display device. The linear luminous lens member 237 or the like emits light at the time of presentation of the effect by 244, making it difficult to miss the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and entertaining Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light emission lens members 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission of the linear light emission lens members 237 and the like can be made more noticeable than in the case of emitting light in a dot shape. Can be made to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc. easily, and enjoy the effects of the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 and the touch panel 246 etc. It is possible to suppress the decrease. In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission aspect is different from the light emission of the other light emission decorative body etc., and misunderstanding as light emission of the light emission decorative body etc can be reduced. The light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are disposed at a position on the rear side close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like The light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily entered into the player's field of vision, and the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed to enjoy the effect of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244.

  Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, there is provided the effect operation unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is struck in the game area 5a. The upper dish liquid crystal display 244 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are turned when the line of sight is directed to the upper plate 201 since the player for checking the amount of game balls to be closed turns the line of sight at a certain frequency. It becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player turns the gaze toward the upper tray 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the gaze from the inside of the game area 5a to the upper tray 201 (upper tray liquid crystal display 244). Therefore, when the light emission from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately shifted to the upper dish liquid crystal display 244, and the effect presented by the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is enjoyed and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the rendering operation unit 200 is disposed below the gaming area 5a, and light from the linear luminous lens member 237 or the like is emitted from the bottom to the player, therefore, it is disposed above the gaming area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to easily see the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc., so that it becomes possible to make the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 pay attention to the player reliably. It is possible to enjoy the effect by the operation unit 200 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper dish liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 5a, the center of the line of sight of the player is in any position in the game area 5a. However, it is possible to easily notice the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is possible to surely make the player pay attention to the upper dish liquid crystal display 244, and enjoy the effect by the effect operation unit 200. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the rendering operation unit 200 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the rendering by the image, it is possible to perform rendering for causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and it is possible to entertain the player by various renderings. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to cause the player to participate in the effect, and it is possible to actively enjoy the effect for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting unit 237b) disposed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball emitting device 680). An upper tray ball extraction button 239 is disposed along the feeding guide passage portion 212a and operates the upper tray ball removal unit 310 with the guide passage portion 212a. That is, the linear luminous lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear luminous lens member 237 is disposed at a position which the player cares during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emission lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is drawn to the touch unit 220B and the effect by the touch unit 220B (effect image by the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 It is easy to notice the timing of touch operation etc.).

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 of the dish unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B while being disposed at a position higher than that of the touch unit 220B, the outer plate 201 can be exposed to the air on the upper plate main body 212 or the surface of the game ball Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows downward of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), the condensed water can be prevented from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, It is possible to prevent a problem such as short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 without being exposed to the water droplets condensed by the upper plate 201.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibrating unit 242 in the effect operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, a plurality (two) of the touch units 220B are provided. The damper 222 is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A in a floating state so that the vibration of the touch unit 220B (excitation device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. As a result, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B is vibrated. It is possible to sufficiently impart the operation feeling of 246, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the sense of operation of the touch panel 246 for the player, it is surprising to be surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or suggests timing for operating the touch panel 246. It is possible to enjoy the operation effects by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or load is applied to the touch unit 220B by tapping or strongly pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it becomes possible to absorb the impact etc., damage to the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A etc. due to the impact etc can be reduced, and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B etc. Can prevent the player's interest from being reduced.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is used as the portion operated by the touch unit 220B, when the player operates, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time than when the button is pressed. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when touching 246, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, the player can feel that the player is operating the touch panel 246 by vibrating the finger of the player, so that a sufficient feeling of operation can be given, and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to cope with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest by the various effects. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is provided with the touch panel 246, compared with the conventional pressing button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, it is possible to perform more various operation effects, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A (unit case 231) immovably upward and movably downward, and the touch unit 220B is moved by the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move while operating the touch panel 246, and the touch panel 246 can be easily operated properly. In addition, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it can make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B thought to not move is excited according to the gaming state. By vibrating by the device 242, the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the plurality of vibration exciters 242 which are separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration exciter 242 at a position close to the portion operated by the player in the touch panel 246 Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the touch panel 246 operates a position different from the position to be operated by the player, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is notified that the operation is wrong. As a result, the player can be made to perform the correct operation, and the enjoyment of the operation using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration exciters 242 which are separated from each other are provided, the resonance phenomenon is generated at an arbitrary position of the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of the vibration of each vibration exciter 242 and the like. Can. Therefore, by controlling each excitation device 242 so that the resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to impart a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is hit or pressed from the upper side and an impact or load acts on the touch unit 220B, both left and right sides of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, it is possible to absorb (attenuate) an impact or the like from the upper side to some extent and transmit it to the unit case 231 side by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B. Further, on the unit case 231 side, the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, so that an impact or load from the touch unit 220 B side via the unit case 231 can be applied to the mounting base 230. It can be distributed widely and transmitted. At this time, of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c into which the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted at the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 Since a gap is formed between the inner circumferential wall and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving protrusion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c abut each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward by an impact or a load from the touch unit 220B. As a result, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the deflection or the like of the unit case 231 transmits the impact or the like to the mounting base 230 in a state where the impact or the like is further attenuated. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c abut, the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) impact and load from the side of the mounting base 230 are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, along a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 As a result, the force in the direction (downward) perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting base 230 to be bent is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or pressed from the upper side, the shocks and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B or Damage to the mounting base unit 220A can be suppressed.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. FIG. 54 (a) is a perspective view of the door cover of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 55 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the fowl cover unit with the lid removed and seen from the front, and FIG. 55 (b) is an exploded perspective view with the lid removed and the fal cover unit seen from behind. Further, FIG. 56 is a front view of the fowl cover unit with the lid member removed.

  The fowl cover unit 520 of this embodiment is attached to the front of the unit main body 522 and a shallow box-like unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and open on the front side as shown in the figure. And a flat lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 is a penetrating ball which penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view and brings the normal induction passage 861 of the lower full-ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 into communication with the upper countersink supply port 210a of the plate unit 200. A channel 526, and a full ball receiving opening 528 opened rearward as viewed from the right side of the through ball passage 526 and in communication with a full channel guiding portion 862 of the lower full ball channel unit 860 of the main body frame 4; Is equipped.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is opened upward on the right side in front view of the full tank receptacle 528, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. The ball ball receiving port 530 for receiving the game ball (far ball) and the game ball which is opened forward in the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball socket 528 and the ball ball socket 530 And a ball discharge port 532 in communication with the lower ball and ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball receiving hole 528 and the far ball receiving hole 530 and the ball discharging hole 532 by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524 to store a predetermined amount of gaming balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible size, a flat movable piece 534 which constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 533 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 522, movable A full tank detection sensor 535 for detecting rotation of the piece 534 in a direction away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 biasing the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

  In the far cover unit 520, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls are not released from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side, they are stored in the storage passage 533 to some extent. Number of game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves away from the storage passage 533 by the weight of the gaming balls. The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of gaming balls, so that when full is detected by the full detection sensor 535, the payout of more gaming balls is stopped, This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge that the lower tray 202 be filled up.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 526 on the rear side of the unit main body 522, and a door opening / closing door of the lower full ball passage unit 860 in the dispensing unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening and closing contact portion 537 capable of being in contact with the operation projection 863e of 863 is provided (see FIG. 79). The door opening and closing contact portion 537 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing abutment portion 537 is formed such that the operation projection 863 e of the guide path door member 863 abuts. When the operation projection 863e of the guide path opening / closing portion 863 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 537, the guide path door member 863 is rotated and the downstream ends of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 ) Can be released.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is removably accommodated therein. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is closed It is attached openably and closably.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-like main body frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame The lower side hinge member 150 comprises a body frame upper hinge member 620 and a body frame lower hinge member 640 rotatably mounted, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. .

  In addition, the main unit frame 4 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 is attached, which locks between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the body frame base 600. A reverse L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out gaming balls to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable mounted on the rear side And a back cover 980 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view. The body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and the game board insertion slot 601 in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side The lower side of the board insertion slot 601 is formed, and the game board placement unit 602 on which the game board 5 is placed and the upper side of the game board placement unit 602 project upward from the left and right direction And a game board control unit 603 for restricting the backward movement.

  Further, the main unit frame 4 has a launch device attachment portion 604 for attaching the ball launch device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board placement portion 602 in front view, and front and rear in the front view right side of the launch device attachment portion 604 And a cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a bass speaker of the board unit 900 which penetrates back and forth from the left and right center from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view And a circular opening for the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 facing forwardly. And have.

  Furthermore, the main body frame 4 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side in a front view of the game board insertion slot 601, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatably attached to the rear end. And a rear extension 608. The body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the left end in a front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge for attaching the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is rotatably mounted at a position slightly lower on the left side from the left and right center of the gaming board placement portion 602 in the opening cover 615 closing the connection opening 606 so as to open and close. A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the body frame 4.

  An upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape projecting upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621 A body frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an upper hinge main body 621 in front view left side of the body frame hinge pin 622 penetrate the door frame side upper hinge member 140 And an upper hinge hole 623 for a door frame. In the main frame side upper hinge member 620, a portion of the upper hinge main body 621 that is bent downward is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame 4.

  The lower hinge member 640 on the body frame side vertically penetrates at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the plate material extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And an outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed on the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 641 The rear part of the plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates up and down at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 and the lower hinge second main body 643 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 The door frame extends upward from the left end on the rear side of the lower hinge hole 644 for supporting the door frame and the lower hinge hole 644 at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second body 643 has a horizontally extending portion spaced upward from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 641 and a portion bent upward is a first lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of a portion of the main body 641 that is bent upward. The lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 of the main body lower hinge member 640 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The cross section of the reinforcing frame 660 in plan view is formed in a U shape whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 to the front and up and down to the rear side of the part extending rightward from the front end. The left positioning member 661 is mounted in a pair at vertically spaced positions.

  The hinge side (left side in front view) of the main frame base 600 can be reinforced by the reinforcing frame 660, and the inside of the main frame 4 (game board 5) from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent incorrect insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57, 59 and 60. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4. In this ball launcher 680, the hitting strength of the gaming ball changes in accordance with the pivot angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 in the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 681 in a front view. A firing solenoid 682 formed of a rotary solenoid extending forward and penetrating, a hitting ball 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682 and a tip end extending diagonally upward from the tip of the hitting ball 683 And a launch rail 684 mounted on the front of the launch base 681 so that the game balls can roll.

  In this ball launcher 680, gaming balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the gaming balls are supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684 Then, when the handle lever 504 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength according to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hit ball 683. Then, the game balls hit by the hitting ball 683 are guided to the guide rails (the outer rails 1001 and the inner rails 1002) of the game board 5 through the launch rails 684 and driven into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball, etc., between the firing rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Then, it falls to the ball receptacle 530 of the lower far cover unit 520 and is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the inside of the far cover unit 520.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 that project forward from the unit base 701. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting backward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting cylindrically from the lower part of the unit base 701 forward from the front side And a key cylinder 710 that unlocks locking of either the door frame wedge 702 or the outer frame wedge 703 according to the turning direction of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Disbursement unit]
The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 65 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 67 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 67 (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 70 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 70 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 70 (a). Further, FIG. 71 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is closed by the ball drawing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 71 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is opened by the ball drawing movable piece. It is. FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the dispensing blade in the dispensing device in an enlarged manner.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 73 (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit. FIG. 74 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear is there. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank passage unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank passage unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 78 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . Further, FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between the fowl cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank passage unit. FIG. 180 is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, etc., the dispensing unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper portion of the dispensing unit base 801. Ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending upward and downward and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 A tank rail 803 extends to the left and right for guiding the gaming ball in the ball tank 802 in a left direction in a front view. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided leftward and aligned in the front and rear two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 180) swingably suspended from above.

  In addition, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the top left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guides the gaming balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; A payout device 830 which dispenses the gaming balls removably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball induction unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950. And have. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, gaming balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the gaming balls are paid out one by one.

  Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the gaming balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and according to the storage state of the gaming balls on the upper tray 201 in the tray unit 200. The upper full ball passage unit 850 for releasing the water from either the normal discharge hole 850 d or the full discharge hole 850 e, and the normal discharge hole 850 d of the upper full ball passage unit 850 attached to the lower end of the discharge unit base 801 The guide ball 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. The game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e is guided forward from the front end of the door frame 3. The main frame of a full tank induction passage 862 guiding to the full tank reception hole 530, and the front end opening of the normal guidance passage 861 and the full tank guidance passage 862 And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. The ball guiding unit 820 extends vertically and has a box-like front case 821 open at the rear side, a box-like rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and the front side open, and the front case A flat plate-like partition plate 823 attached between the 821 and the rear case 822 and separating the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and the partition plate 823 penetrate both front and rear ends to the front case 821 and the rear race 822 A rod-like shaft member 824 attached, and a pair of movable piece members 825 and 826 rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and disposed in the front case and the rear case, respectively And a ball breakage detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational position of the pair of movable piece front 825 and movable piece rear 826.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding inlet 821a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. 821 b, and a guiding passage 821 c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821 a with the ball guiding outlet 821 b and through which the game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d The detection unit 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821d to the left and right of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side in a front view of the detection portion 821e in the guiding passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding inlet 822a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage, and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. A guide passage 822c is provided, which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a with the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which the game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d The detection unit 822 e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822 f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822 d to the left and right of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection portion 822e in the guiding passage 822c in a front view.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. The guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction in a state where the ball guide unit 820 is assembled There is.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the induction passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 is a flat movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a into which the shaft member 824 is inserted An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle with respect to the right surface of the movable piece 825a; an extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a; and fanning around the shaft hole 825b A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and which penetrates back and forth, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f extending outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and detectable by the broken ball detection sensor 827 and extending outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece front 825 rotates so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 825b by its own weight. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted through the notch 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 821c. In addition, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guiding passage 821c, the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guiding passage 821c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f of the movable piece front 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when the gaming ball is in the guiding passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member back 826 is a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically and a shaft hole 826b which is penetrated back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a Extending from the upper end of the movable piece 826a to the right surface of the movable piece 826a at right angles with the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a, and fan-shapedly extending around the shaft hole 826b A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and which penetrates back and forth A detection piece 826f which extends outward in a flat plate shape from the right end and can be detected by the broken ball detection sensor 827, and extends outward in a flat plate shape from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is pivoted so as to be positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b by its own weight. The movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Accordingly, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822 and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the induction | guidance | derivation passage 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 822c. In addition, when the movable piece front 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left side surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece front 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the induction passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  In the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls are supplied in a row in the back and forth direction by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are provided in a state in which the plurality of gaming balls are aligned. The lower dispensing device 830 can be guided back and forth in two rows by 822 (see FIG. 180). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the gaming balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c, 822c do not interfere with each other, and are well distributed. Can.

  In addition, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball abuts on the movable piece 825a and 826a of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826, and the movable piece 825a and 826a The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 rotate in a direction coincident with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821 c and 822 c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that gaming balls are present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game ball flows in the guide passage 821c, 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d is the movable piece at the upper portion of the detection portion 821e, 822e It will rebound to the 825a, 826a side, and will abut on the movable piece 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, they are pinched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c by the vibration. Dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by means of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece 826 respectively, and also the movable piece front 825 and the movable Since each detection piece 825f, 826f of the single member back 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game ball in any of the guide paths 821c, 822c disappears, the movable piece front 825 Alternatively, the movable piece 825a, 826a of the movable piece member 826 is rotated so as to protrude into the guiding passage 821c, 822c, and the detection piece 825f, 826f on the side where the game ball is lost is detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 . Therefore, the game balls can be detected early, so that the game balls can be quickly replenished, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, the player's interest can be reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 and the weight can be obtained by screwing in and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826. As a result, the lower end sides of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily turned in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the induction passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the induction passage 821c, 822c, so dust in the induction passage 821c, 822c No dust or the like adheres to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Thus, the rotation of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, the movable piece 825a, 826a at the lower end side of the movable piece 825a, 826a after the movable piece 825 and 826 after the lower end side protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, 822c The weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece 826 and the weight of the weight can be used to attach the movable piece 825a by attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 825e, 826e on the opposite side of the surface contacting the gaming ball. , 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the guiding passage 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the guiding passage 821c, 822c, so dust or dirt in the guiding passage 821c, 822c Etc. do not adhere to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Accordingly, the movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece members 825 and 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  In addition, in order to screw and attach a metal screw as a weight to weight attachment portions 825e and 826e as through holes, the weight is fixed even if the front of movable piece 825 and the rear of movable piece 826 rotate frequently. The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 (weight attachment parts 825 e, 826 e) . In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825 e and 826 e, the process of attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guiding path 821c, 822c is provided with the introduction portion 822d for guiding the gaming ball toward the movable piece 825a, 825c on the upstream side of the portion where the movable piece 825a, 825c protrudes inside. Since the game balls contact the movable pieces 825a and 826a by the game balls flowing in the passages 821c and 822c, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, dust, dirt and the like which are pinched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls of the induction passages 821c, 822c can be removed by the vibration of the movable pieces 825a, 826a, and movable by their own weight etc. The front member 825 and the rear movable member 826 can be rotated well.

  Therefore, since the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be favorably rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the gaming ball in the guiding path 821c, 822c can be detected reliably, and It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect due to a false detection or the like. In addition, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the inside of the guide passage 821c, 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passage 821c, 822c can be reliably detected through the movable pieces 825a, 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the game ball, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

[4-6 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 830 of the dispensing unit 800 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout device 830 has a box shape whose rear side is open, and the payout opening 831a where the gaming ball is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and the gaming ball is open near the left end in front view Payout outlet 831b, ball outlet outlet 831c where gaming balls are open for passage near the right end of the front view in the bottom surface, payout opening 831a and payout outlet 831b are communicated and the payout passage 831d through which gaming balls can flow , And a dispensing passage 831 d branched from the middle and communicated with the ball outlet 831 c and has a ball out passage 831 e through which gaming balls can flow, and is attached to the back side of the front box 831 The game ball is open near the left end of the top view in the bottom view in the bottom of the payout opening 832a where the game ball is open so that the game ball can pass in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. A payout opening 832b which is overly open, a ball outlet 832c which allows gaming balls to pass in the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the bottom, a payout opening 832a and a payout outlet 832b are communicated, and the gaming balls are distributed It has a possible payout passage 832d and a rear box 832 branched from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicating with the ball removal outlet 832c and having a ball removal passage 832e through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 open on the rear side, and is mounted in the front box 831 and the rotation shaft passes through the front box 831 The delivery motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 834, and the drive gear 835 are meshed and can be rotated by the front box 831 and the front cover 833 The intermediate gear 836 in the form of a spur gear attached to the gear, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably penetrated, the front end being attached to the front cover 833 and the rear The shaft member 838, the end of which passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 837, and the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are dispelled. A blade rotation detection sensor 840 disposed in the passages 831 d and 832 d and disposed between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detecting a rotation of the discharge blade 839. And have.

  Furthermore, the dispensing device 830 is a flat-plate-like partition plate 841 attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to separate the dispensing passage 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832 d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a gaming ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b by the rotation of the payout blade 839, the payout passage 831d and 832d, and the ball release passage 831e, 832e is a portion where it is bifurcated and is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and it is possible to close the ball removal passage 831e, 832e, the ball extraction movable piece 843, the front box 831, And a ball pulling lever 844 slidably mounted up and down on the upper right side surface of the box 832 so as to make the ball pulling movable piece 843 pivotable or non-rotatable It is equipped with a.

  The dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 obliquely extends from the dispensing inlet 831a toward the ball removing outlet 831c to the lower right of the front view, and descends at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831 To extend vertically to the left, and bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the front box 831 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 831b so as to be positioned just above the discharge outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the front box 831. The delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 831d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831 e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge inlet 831 a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831 d, and has a height of about one third from the upper surface It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface of the front view right side with a guide shelf 831 f projecting backward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the discharge outlet 831 b in the discharge passage 831 d. And a lever attaching portion 831g for slidably attaching the ball removing lever 844 up and down.

  The discharge passage 832d of the rear box 832 obliquely extends from the discharge port 832a toward the ball removal outlet 832c to the lower right of the front view, and is lower at a height of about one third from the upper surface with respect to the entire height And bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the rear box 832 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the discharge outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832. The delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 832d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge port 832a to the lower right in the discharge passage 832d, and is about 1/3 height from the upper surface to the entire height of the rear box 832 It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface in a front view and a guiding shelf 832f projecting forward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d. And a lever mounting portion 832g for slidably mounting the ball release lever 844 in the vertical direction.

  The dispensing passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the back box 832 and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831 d and 832 d are partitioned by the partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is disposed. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide racks 831 f and 832 f and the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b. That is, the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 are front and rear of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a in the circumferential direction at an angle of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the spur gear shape that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840 A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connection portion 837c which protrudes cylindrically from the center of the gear portion 837a and has projections and depressions formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end and which can be connected to the discharge blade 839 .

  The delivery blade 839 extends in a cylindrical shape from the front to the back, and projects in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals from the front end of the base cylinder 839a into which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the front end of the base cylinder 839a. (A plurality of (three) front blades 839b, and a plurality of (three) projecting from the rear end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the base cylindrical portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to alternate with the front blades 839b The third part of the rear blade 839c, and a connected part projecting cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical part 839a and having projections and depressions that can be connected with the connection part 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end And 839 d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the discharge blade 839 are respectively provided three by three at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is circumferentially opposed to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It is extended outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, three front blades 839 b (rear blades 839 c) are connected by a circular arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, between the front wings 839b (rear wings 839c), a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumference of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c with respect to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In addition, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a in the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball (see FIG. 72). That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. 0 of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. It is supposed to be four times.

  Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the gaming ball may be held by the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the gaming ball can be accommodated. As a result, the gaming balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be quickly stored in the space (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

  In the delivery blade 839 of this embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the delivery passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the delivery passage 832d of the rear box 832 in the assembled state of the delivery device 830. The game balls in the payout paths 831 d and 832 d can be paid out respectively. Further, the delivery blade 839 is disposed at a location where the delivery passage 831 d and 832 d is bent in a crank shape below the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the dispensing blade 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. In the crank-shaped portion of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) far from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839 and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball (see FIG. 61). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the portion formed in the arc shape of the payout paths 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. .

  Thus, the payout device 830 can pass through the crank-folded portions of the payout passages 831 d and 832 d when the gaming balls having flowed down onto the payout blades 839 abut the outer periphery of the front blades 839 b and 839 c. In addition, it is not discharged downward from the delivery outlets 831 b and 832 b. On the other hand, when the gaming ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the cranked portion of the payout passage 831d, 832d, and from the payout outlet 831b, 832b It is discharged downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front wing 839b and the rear wing 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball is 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since the depth of 1⁄7 to 1⁄4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time taken to accommodate the gaming balls while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout wing 839 is rotated fast, the gaming ball can be housed in the ball housing portion 839e and sent to the payout outlet 831b, 832b side. Therefore, the number of game balls paid out per unit time can be increased more than in the past, and the time taken to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the top and bottom and front and back, and the lower portion is bent to extend in a tubular shape in the front and back at the upper end of the main portion 843a formed in a V shape. A cylindrical portion 843b rotatably attached at its both ends to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of an outer side of the main portion 843a bent in a V shape, and a main portion 843c And a weight attachment portion 843d (see FIG. 71) formed of a through hole penetrating in the front and back direction in a lower part bent in a V-shape.

  In the assembled state of the dispensing device 830, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, and the upper cylindrical portion 843b dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832 In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position obliquely extending from the delivery port 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view slightly above the portion bent downward Is attached to

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 according to the present embodiment slides the ball release lever 844 downward, and the lower portion of the ball release lever 844 is in contact with the protrusion 843 c of the ball release movable piece 843 from the right in front view. I am in touch. Thereby, the pivoting movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 71A).

  In this normal state, in the main portion 843a of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 bent in the V-shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is a front left lower left It extends to The lower end of the main body 843a is located in the vicinity of a portion where the dispensing passages 831d and 832d and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, while the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (the main body portion 843a), the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left forms a part of the walls of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The unrolling movable piece 843 of this embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the unpunching movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the axial cylinder portion 843b in a normal state. Thus, a force is exerted to try to rotate counterclockwise in a front view, but since the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball release lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball extracting lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball extracting lever 844 is separated from the projecting portion 843 c of the ball extracting movable member 843 and the counterclockwise movement of the ball extracting movable member 843 is counterclockwise. Motion restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is positioned immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843 b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 60 (b)). As a result, the ball releasing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the gaming balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a contact the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e and discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In this embodiment, since the ball removing movable piece 843 is provided with a weight attaching portion 843d, the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward by screwing in and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portion 843d. And when the restriction on the pivoting in the counterclockwise direction in the front view is released, the lower end of the deballing movable piece 843 is projected into the deballing passages 381 e and 832 e by the weight of the deballing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be made easy to turn in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  Further, in a normal state in which the ball extracting lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball extracting passages 831e and 832e, the gaming ball entering from the payout opening 831a and 832a is attached to the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, it is possible to vibrate the ball removing movable piece 843 by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust, dirt, etc. which are pinched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surface of the ball removing passage 831e, 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate by biting in dust or the like.

  In addition, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attachment portion 843d formed as the through hole, the weight can be removed from the movable member 843 even if the movable member 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the (weight attachment portion 843d). In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 Cost can be reduced.

  By the way, when the ball removing passage 843e closes the ball removing passages 831e and 832e for a long period of time, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable member 843 and the rotating shaft is rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls entering from the payout opening 831a and 832a are in contact with the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the lock is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, thereby causing an impact of the contact. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball releasing lever 844 is operated to open the ball releasing passages 831 e and 832 e, the ball releasing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removing operation can be surely performed. Workability at the time of maintenance can be improved.

[4-6 c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the lower side of the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-like upper full tank base 851 open at the rear side, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and the front side is open. A box-like upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing apparatus pressing member 853 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing apparatus 830 upward are provided.

  Also, the upper full-ball-path unit 850 has an upper outlet ball socket 850a which is open upwards so that gaming balls can pass upward in a region from the left-right center to the left in front view on the upper surface, and Is formed between the upper ball-out opening 850b which is open upward to allow the game ball to pass through at the part of the upper part, the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852 and received by the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which gaming balls circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a lower portion of the upper ball discharge passage 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage At the lower end of the passage 850c, a full tank outlet 850e opened downward at a site excluding the normal outlet 850d, a normal outlet 850d and a full tank outlet 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  Also, the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 is an upper upper ball-opening passage 850g for guiding the gaming ball entering from the upper ball-opening inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion opened downward at the lower end of the upper ball-opening passage 850g. And a ball outlet 850h. In the upper full tank passage unit 850, the normal outlet 850d, the full tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are sequentially opened downward from the left side in front view. In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  The upper full ball passage unit 850 is assembled to the dispensing unit 800, and the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a is located directly below the dispensing outlet 831b of the dispensing device 830, and the upper ball removal inlet 850b is It is located directly below the ball outlet 831 c of the dispenser 830. Also, when the upper full-tank passage unit 850 is assembled to the delivery unit 800, the normal outlet 850d, the full-tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are normally guided paths of the lower full-ball passage unit Openings 861, a full tank guide passage 862, and a lower ball removal guide passage 865 are respectively directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 180).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the gaming balls dispensed by the dispensing device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the gaming ball that has entered into the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper discharge ball socket 850a opens immediately below the upper discharge ball socket 850a. The normal outlet 850d is released.

  When the inside of the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with gaming balls and can not store the gaming balls, and the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball passage unit 860 is filled with gaming balls, the game is released normally. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When the gaming ball enters into the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. When the amount of gaming balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the dividing pieces 850f, the gaming balls that have newly entered the upper ball storage passage 850c overcome the dividing pieces 850f and become full. It is discharged downward from the tongue outlet 850e, and is sent to the lower tray 202 through the filling channel 862 of the lower filling channel unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full tank ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper tray 201 in accordance with the storage amount of the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the dispensing unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full ball channel unit 850 in the dispensing unit base 801. The lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming ball discharged from the normal outlet 850 d of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward to guide it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. And a full tank induction passage 862 for guiding the gaming balls discharged from the full tank outlet 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the full tank receptacle 530 of the door frame 3 from the front end; A guideway opening / closing door 863 for opening and closing the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 And a closing spring 864 urging the front end opening of the

  In addition, the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming balls discharged from the upper ball outlet 850h of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward and from above the center right end in the front-rear direction on the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900. A lower ball out guideway 865 is provided for release into.

  In the lower full-tan ball route unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full-tan guide path 862, and the lower open ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in front view. The rear ends of the normal guide path 861, the full guide path 862, and the lower ball removal guide path 865 open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full guiding path 862 extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower than the width at which the game balls are arranged side by side. Furthermore, the full induction passage 862 usually extends forward at a lower position than the induction passage 861. The normal induction passage 861, the full induction passage 862, and the lower ball out induction passage 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 which can be divided up and down as shown in the drawing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached at a front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guideway 861 and the full induction way 862 and is closed by a closing spring 864 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. It is energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860, the full induction channel 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal induction channel 861 in a front view, normally It is placed at a lower position by the height of the ball. And, the guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front and rear direction, generally at a position below the guideway 861 and at the left side of the full induction passage 862.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 has a disk-like base 863a rotatably mounted, and a first door plate 863b which extends in a flat plate shape obliquely from the base 863a to the upper left and can normally close the front end opening of the guideway 861. A second door plate 863c extending flatly to the right from the base 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full induction channel 862; and an extension 863d extending flatly from the base 863a to the lower left side The operation projection 863e protrudes forward from the front end of the extension 863d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the door cover 3 with the door opening / closing contact portion 537.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 does not have to close the openings, as long as the game balls can not pass. The actuating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a in a front view shape, and is inclined so that the front end surface projects forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is biased in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate 863c is from below the front end opening of the full induction path 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. By being in contact with the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  In the lower full-tan ball passage unit 860 of the present embodiment, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the front end is a through ball passage 526 in the far cover unit 520 of the door frame 3; It is attached at a position opposite to the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 79). And, in the state where the doorway 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, nothing is in contact with the operation projection 863e in the state where the doorway 3 is open to the body frame 4. Thus, the second door plate 863 c is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and is stopped in a state in which the second door plate 863 c is in contact with the boss 867 a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located at the front of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 and close the front end opening (FIG. 78). See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the gaming balls in the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can not move forward from the front end opening, and even when the door frame 3 is opened, the normal induction passage 861 and full induction There are no spills of gaming balls from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the door cover 3 in the door frame 3 abuts on the front end surface of the operation projection 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863. The inclination of the front end face of the projection 863 e acts on the urging force of the closing spring 864 to turn the guide path opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view. As a result, the first door plate 863 b and the second door plate 863 c that normally closed the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening. The front end opening of the full tank induction passage 862 is open (see FIG. 78 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863 b is located below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate 863 c is located above the front end opening of the full induction passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end opening of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal induction passage 861 and the full A through ball passage 526 and a full ball receiving hole 528 of the far cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862 and penetrated from the side of the normal guide passage 861 and the full guide passage 862 The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving hole 528 side.

  In this manner, the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 are made different by vertically varying the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 and rotating the induction passage opening / closing door 863. Since the opening and closing of the induction passage opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, the opening / closing mechanism of the normal passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively enlarged, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more gaming balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3 becomes full of gaming balls and can not release the gaming balls to the upper tray 201. When the player pays out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 is full of game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank channel 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of the gaming balls is automatically switched to the lower tray 202 through the foul cover unit 520. Thereafter, when a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls in addition to the upper plate 201 and can not supply the game balls to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 533 of the Then, when the movable piece 534 is rotated by the game ball being stored in the storage passage 533 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full of game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is cancelled.

  The game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the far cover unit 520, for example, when the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535. In the upstream storage passage 533, the full tank induction passage 862 of the lower full tank passage unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850 c of the upper full tank passage unit 850. When the game ball of the above is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, since it is possible to store more gaming balls than conventional pachinko machines, in the gaming state in which many gaming balls are paid out, such as during a big hit, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 It is possible to reduce the need to be concerned about being filled with gaming balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on and play a big hit game.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board | substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 57 thru | or FIG. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the back of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 with the board unit base 910 attached to the back side of the body frame base 600 in front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and having the power supply board housed therein, and the back side of the speaker unit 920 are interface controlled An interface control board box 940 in which the boards are accommodated, and a payout control board mounted over the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and in which a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of gaming balls is accommodated. And a box 950.

  The dispensing device 830 is controlled by the dispensing control substrate 951 accommodated in the dispensing control substrate box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the entire configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 81 to 88. FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the left front, FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the right, and FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from behind. FIG. 84 (A) is a front view of the game board, and (B) is an AA cross-sectional view cut at the center of the game board. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the panel decoration 1000 by dividing the outer periphery of the above-mentioned game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and the rear end of the game decoration 5a. The game panel 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached to the back side lower portion of the back panel 3000 attached to the back surface of the game panel 2000, the back panel 3000 attached to the back surface of the game panel 2000, and the back panel 3000 And a substrate holder 1200. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front of the game panel 2000 which is within the game area 5a.

  In addition, the main control unit 1300 having a main control board 4100 (see FIG. 130) attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and performing control relating to the progression of the game on the game board 5; Function display unit 1400 attached to the back of the back unit 3000 to display the game situation based on the control signal from 4100) and to be attached visibly to the player side at the lower left corner of the panel decoration 1000; Peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 4140) for controlling effects based on control signals from unit 1300 (main control board 4100), and further attached to the front side of the back of back unit 3000 and viewed from the front The peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 4140) is disposed at the center of the area 5a. Such as a liquid crystal display device 3600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image based on et control signals is also provided.

  However, although described later, the liquid crystal display device 3600 according to this embodiment is configured to include the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device Each 3620 is provided with a structure that can move up and down. Along with this, as the above-mentioned back unit 3000, a special space for securing the effect space where the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be made movable, an arrangement space of the drive unit for applying the driving force to the liquid crystal display device 3600, etc. It has a structure and is provided. In the present embodiment, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is longer in the vertical direction than the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and narrower in width.

  In the liquid crystal display device 3600 according to this embodiment, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 can be displayed so as to straddle the specific effect image, whereby a large display effect It is possible to realize, or perform effects linked by two display units.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the game board 5 has a panel decoration 1000 for partitioning the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a plate-shaped game panel 2000 attached to the rear side of the panel decoration 1000, and a game. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the panel 2000. In the game panel 2000, a starting opening unit 2200 having a first starting opening 2002, a first big winning opening, and the like, and a center character 2500 are attached to the front. The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 and a liquid crystal drive unit 3400 attached to the back of the back box 3010. The back box 3010 has a box shape, and the front side character unit 3200 (face drive unit 3210, shoulder drive unit 3220, full burst drive unit (lower unit) 3230, right guiding path 3250) is attached to the wall thereafter Be In addition, the decoration unit 3100 (back decoration upper unit 3110, back decoration left unit 3120, back decoration lower unit 3130) is attached so as to overlap the front side of the front side character unit 3200, and the front side goods located in the standby position It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize each of the units 3200.

  The liquid crystal storage unit 3480 of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 has a box shape, and houses the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. A liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is attached in front of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. When the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 and the back box are close to the front of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display 3620 and the rear end A stepped portion 3315 is provided on the back wall of the back box 3010 so as not to interfere with the step 3010. The stepped portion 3315 is provided in accordance with the movable range of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. A main control unit 1300, a peripheral control unit 1500, and a rear end decoration unit 3700 are attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400.

  In this respect, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, as described above, the rear end decoration unit 3700 is provided with a structure that can meet such a request. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment includes the upper control unit 3610 and the lower control unit 3620 as the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500. It is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 so as to avoid this in a front view without overlapping with the effect space created when it is moved. This makes it possible to make the best use of the rendering space created when the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are moved in the depth direction, and consequently a large torso utilizing the depth direction to the end of the game machine It becomes possible to arrange the drive unit 3700. As shown in FIG. 84 (b), a body drive unit 3700 projecting rearward than the rearmost end of the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and the thickness of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 provided in front of it. By having the movable decorative portion 3710 thicker than that, it is possible to provide an effect with a real feeling.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although it will be described later, the thick portion of the movable decorative portion 3710 having such a thickness is realized as a movable effect to face the player. Even if the effect space opened by the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is relatively small, the thick portion is made to face the player after passing through this effect space. This makes it possible to provide a movable effect that is larger than the area in front view in the effect space.

[5-1. Panel decoration]
Next, the panel decoration 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS.

  In the panel decoration 1000, the outer shape in a front view is substantially square, the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The panel decoration 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end toward the left from the center in the horizontal direction in front view, and extends to the upper right corner through the center upper end in the front view An inner rail 1002 disposed substantially inside 1001 of the panel decoration 1000 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower part in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part, and the game area 5a And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the panel decoration 1000 extends from the front end right end of the out guiding portion 1003 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the panel decoration 1000 and the upper portion is curved rightward in the panel decoration 1000 A stop 1006 connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the panel decoration 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends clockwise from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member 1007 which can be turned only in the direction of rotation and can be turned only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and can be returned to the closed position side by a spring (not shown). Is equipped.

5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 2000 of the gaming board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel 2000. FIG. 88A is a front view of the panel board 2100, FIG. 88B is a cross-sectional view of the panel board 2100 taken along the line A-A, and FIG. 88C is a rear view of the panel board 2100. FIG. 88A is a front view of the center part 2500, FIG. 88B is a cross-sectional view of the center part 2500 taken along the line A-A, and FIG. 88C is a back view of the center part 2500. FIG. 89 shows (a) a front view of the game panel 2000, (b) an enlarged view in the vicinity of the guidance exit, and (c) a cross-sectional view in the vicinity of the guidance exit.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the game panel 2000 has an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped panel ornament 1000 and a transparent flat panel plate 2100, and a horizontal center in the game area 5a. , And a frame-shaped center product 2500 mounted substantially at the center of the game area 5a. The start opening unit 2200 and the center character 2500 are attached to the panel plate 2100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel plate 2100 and the rear end penetrates the opening 2112. It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 2100.

  In addition, the gaming panel 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving gaming balls driven into the gaming area 5a and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 as gaming regions. A first start port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball at different positions in 5a, a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball, and the game ball The second start-up port 2004 where the game ball can be received according to the normal lottery result which is drawn by passing the gate portion 2003, and the game ball received to the first start-up port 2002 or the second start-up port 2004 The first special winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 where the acceptance of the game ball is made possible depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by There.

  Here, the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the vicinity of the lower left in front view in the gaming area 5a, in the vicinity of the lower right in front view in the gaming area 5a, or the like. Among these, the general winning hole 2001 disposed in the vicinity of the lower left in the front view in the game area 5a is provided with two openings capable of simultaneously receiving a plurality of game balls. The gate unit 2003 is disposed substantially right under the stopper 1006 on the right center in a front view in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed between the stopper 1006 and the gate 2003. The first large winning opening 2005 is disposed on the upper right of the first starting opening 2002 in a front view. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 disposed in the vicinity of the lower right of the front view in the gaming area 5 a is disposed immediately above the first large winning opening 2005. The second large winning opening 2006 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003.

5-2a. Panel board]
Next, the panel board 2100 of the gaming panel 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 87 and FIG.

  The panel board 2100 is formed with an out-port 1111 which penetrates back and forth at a position which is the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 2112 are formed in the panel plate 2100 so as to penetrate front and back, and for attaching the starting opening unit 2200 and the center combination 2500. Furthermore, a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the starting opening unit 2200, the center work 2500, and the back unit 3000, and a plurality of positioning holes are formed.

  When the gaming panel 2000 is attached to the rear side of the panel decoration 1000, the out-port 1111 of the panel board 2100 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the panel decoration 1000. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down to the lower end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out guiding portion 1003 to the out port 1111 on the rear side and are discharged to the back side of the gaming panel 2000 through the out port 1111.

  That is, the panel board 2100 is, as is well known, the above-mentioned game area 5a as a flow path through which the game ball flows when the panel decoration 1000 is attached in addition to the start opening unit 2200 and the center character 2500. It is a part provided for the purpose of being produced in the form of compartmentalization. However, although it will be described later, in the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 of the present embodiment, there is no section formed to allow passage of gaming balls against the above purpose, and the panel decoration 1000 is In the attached state, a thin-shaped "clad portion 2113" smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball is limited to being defined by the outer rail 1001.

  Although described later, the above-mentioned margin portion 2113 is a portion which is thinner than other regions and is provided with a depression in a front view, and in this depression, the center character 2500 can be attached by a screw or the like. A plurality of mounting holes 2113a are formed. Also, although this will be described later, the above-mentioned margin portion 2113 is formed from the position facing the exit of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) to the position facing the stopper 1006. It becomes possible to contribute to the stabilization of the downflow in the high-speed downflow section until the game ball shot out vigorously from the rails (the outer rails 1001 and the inner rails 1002) collides with the stop portion 1006 and the momentum is killed. ing.

  In addition, the mounting hole 2113a is also formed in another area of the panel plate 2100 different from the above-mentioned clasp portion 2113, and the front ornament such as the center character 2500 is attached to this area also by a screw or the like. It is made possible.

[5-2b. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting opening unit 2200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The starting opening unit 2200 is provided from the bottom of the center of the game area 5a from the lower left to the out port 1111 and further to the lower right, and is attached to the panel plate 2100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2200 has a warp inlet 2220, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a first large winning opening 2005, and a V winning unit 2210.

  The warp entrance 2220 is formed on the upper left end of the starting opening unit 2200 so as to project from the front, and can receive game balls from above the game area. The game ball received in the warp entrance 2220 is guided to the back side of the game board 5, passes through the warp hole 2123 formed in the panel board 2100, and is placed in the warp passage 2521 disposed on the back side of the panel board 2100. It is induced and flows down on a stage 2530 formed in the center character 2500. Warp related will be described later.

  The general winning opening 2001 is disposed so as to project from the front lower left and lower right of the starting opening unit 2200. Further, between the warp entrance 2220 and the general winning opening 2001 disposed on the lower left, there is formed a shelf 2203 that protrudes forward and extends in the left and right direction so that the right end in the front view is low. The left end of the shelf 2203 is substantially in contact with the inner rail 1002, and the gaming ball having flowed down along the inner rail 1002 can be guided to the right (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf 2203. . The general winning opening 2001 disposed at the lower left is opened toward the upper left in a front view, and is configured to easily receive, for example, gaming balls having flowed down on the shelf 2203. In addition, the general winning a prize opening 2001 disposed in the lower right is disposed immediately above the first large winning a prize opening 2005, and opens upward, and can accept a game ball flowing down the right hitting game area 2540 of the game area 5a. It has become.

  The first starting port 2002 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 so as to project from the front, and the receiving opening is opened upward in a size that can receive only one game ball at a time. In addition, since the decoration plate 2205 is disposed on the front of the first starting opening 2002, the player can not visually recognize the ball entry of the game ball in the front view. The game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is detected by the starting opening switch 3022 (first starting opening switch), and then passes through the starting opening passage hole 2122 formed in the panel plate 2100 to be guided to the back side Be done.

  The first large winning opening 2005 is disposed immediately below the general winning opening 2001 so as to project from the front right above the first starting opening 2002. At the first large winning opening 2005, the upper side is rotatably supported by the starting opening unit 2200, and in the normal gaming state (the first attachment solenoid 2113 is in the non-energized state), the game is directed vertically to the gaming board 5 A plate-shaped first large winning opening door member 2112 is provided which is disposed to close the entrance of the first large winning opening 2005 in a state where it protrudes. When transitioning to the big hit gaming state, the lower side of the first large winning opening door member 2112 is turned backward and downward by the energization of the first attachment solenoid 2113, and the first falling prize opening door member 2112 becomes ready to receive the flowing gaming ball. The game balls that have won the first big winning opening 2005 are counted by the count switch 2110, and are guided to the back side through a guide path provided inside the starting opening unit 2200.

  A V winning opening 2021 is disposed at the right end of the starting opening unit 2200, and when the gaming ball wins, a predetermined lottery is performed. The gaming ball having won the V winning opening 2021 passes through the guiding path provided inside the starting opening unit 2200 and is guided to the back side.

5-2 c. Center feature]
Next, the center product 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG. 90 (a) is a front view of the center character 2500, FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A, and FIG. 90 (c) is a rear view of the center character 2500. FIG. 90 (a) is a front view of the center character 2500 attached to the panel plate 2100, and FIG. 90 (b) is a view for explaining the attachment portion between the center character 2500 and the panel plate 2100 near the guide rail outlet. (C) is sectional drawing of the attachment part of the center character 2500 and the panel board 2100. FIG.

  The center role 2500 is disposed in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2200 and near the center of the front view, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 2100 of the game panel 2000. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and can visually recognize from the front the liquid crystal display device 3600 disposed behind the game panel 2000 and the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 through the frame. . The center product 2500 has a gate section 2003, a second start port 2004, and a second large winning port 2006.

  The center character 2500 is a flat frame-like flange 2511 that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 2100 along the periphery of the opening 2112 that penetrates widely at the center of the panel plate 2100, and the flange 2511 to the front A frame shape having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 which protrudes to prevent the game ball from entering the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 which protrudes backward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 2112. A center base 2510 is provided. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire periphery of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the position of the front circumferential wall 2512 is slightly highest on the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

  The center product 2500 also includes a stage 2530 extending laterally along the lower side within the frame at the center of the center base 2510 in the left-right direction. The gaming ball entering the warp inlet 2220 provided in the starting opening unit 2200 circulates through a warp passage 3050 (see FIG. 94, FIG. 95, etc.) provided on the back side of the panel plate 2100 and It is discharged onto the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522. In the stage 2530, the gaming balls discharged from the warp outlet 2522 roll in the left-right direction on the stage 2530 and are then discharged into the game area 5a.

  When the game board 5 is assembled, the game ball enters the warp entrance 2220 in the game area 5a, and the gaming ball supplied to the stage 2530 via the warp passage 2521, the warp exit 2522, and the guide path 2523 is near the center of the stage 2530. Is released forward and returned to the gaming area 5a again (returned). In the stage 2530, when the gaming board 5 is assembled, the first starting opening 2002 is located directly under the central portion, and when the gaming ball is released from the stage 2530 into the gaming area 5a, it has a high probability. Accepted at the first starting port 2002.

  However, as shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 90 together, the flange portion 2511 provided on the upper portion of the center member 2500 according to this embodiment is formed in accordance with the shape of the margin portion 2113 of the panel plate 2100. When facing in the form of being fitted to the margin portion 2113 of the panel plate 2100, the concave shape of the margin portion 2113 is filled with the thickness of the flange portion 2511 just like the other areas of the panel plate 2100. Provided with a structure that produces

  That is, in the center product 2500 according to this embodiment, the flange portion 2511 provided on the upper portion thereof is positioned opposite to the recessed portion of the margin portion 2113 of the panel plate 2100 so as to fill in the recess shape. In addition to being attached to the front face of the panel plate 2100 by screwing to the plurality of attachment holes 2113a described above in the margin 2113, it is formed on the side of the narrow margin 2113 as described above. The flow path of the game ball which can not be obtained is formed on the side of the flange portion 2511 (center product 2500). As described above, the upper portion of the panel board 2100 can be largely cut, and thereby the depth space of the gaming machine can be extended upward.

  Moreover, in such a configuration, the flange portion 2511 at the top of the center character 2500 is extended from the frame-like portion to a position facing (proximally) the outer rail 1001 of the panel decoration 1000 There is no difference in level between the flange 2511 and other areas of the panel plate 2100.

  The flow path of the game ball formed on the flange 2511 side of the upper part of the center character 2500 conforms to the shape of the above-mentioned margin part 2113, and the outlet of the guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) And from the opposite position to the position facing the stopper 1006. Therefore, in the center product 2500 according to this embodiment, the game ball from the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) is provided in the channel of the game ball formed on the flange portion 2511 side of the upper portion thereof. The left induction passage 2580 for guiding the game to the game area 5a on the left side of the center character 2500, and the right induction for guiding the game ball to the game area 5a (right-handed game area 2540) on the right side A passage 2590 is formed.

  Among them, the right guiding passage 2590 has only a width (flange width) enough to roll one game ball, whereas the left guiding passage 2580 has a right guiding passage 2590 A portion capable of rolling the gaming ball at substantially the same position and a portion capable of rolling the gaming ball on the lower side of the right guiding path 2590 are provided. That is, the gaming ball rolling at substantially the same position as the right guiding passage 2590 in the left guiding passage 2580 may roll to the right guiding passage 2590 as it is, but from the right guiding passage 2590 The game ball rolling on the lower side is not likely to roll to the right guiding path 2590, and is guided to the game area 5a on the left side of the center character 2500.

  Further, in the portion of the left guiding passage 2580 which can roll the gaming ball on the lower side of the right guiding passage 2590, it is integrally formed of resin and the flange portion 2511 of the center part 2500 and has a convex shape. A plurality of obstacle structures 2581 are provided, and the game ball is on the left side of the center part 2500 through any of the plurality of flow paths formed between (the valleys) of the obstacle structures 2581. It is guided to the area 5a. According to such a configuration, since it is not necessary to use an obstacle nail when forming a plurality of flow paths in the left induction passage 2580, it is possible to form the flange portion 2511 with a small thickness. become.

  In the left guiding passage 2580, whether or not the gaming ball will roll below the right guiding passage 2590, a plurality of flow paths formed between the plurality of obstacle structures 2581 As to which ball the game ball rolls, it is determined by the magnitude of the firing intensity according to the rotation angle when the handle lever 504 is rotated, and the game ball is beaten by the skill of the player It is possible to divide.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 90, the right guiding passage 2590 of the center accessory 2500 is formed from the portion communicated with the left guiding passage 2580 to the position facing the stopper 1006, and the lower side thereof. The game ball from the left guiding path 2580 is guided to the right-handed game area 2540 (the game area 5a on the right side of the center character 2500) formed on the side, and the game ball is supplied.

  However, in the right side induction passage 2590 according to this embodiment, in adopting a structure in which the panel plate 2100 is screwed to the lower side below the stopper portion 1006, the panel is darely selected in the screwed portion. By providing a step between the board 2100 and the other areas, the ball speed suppressed by the stopper 1006 is further suppressed, and the right hitting game area 2540 (the game area 5a on the right side of the center character 2500) To improve the stability of the game in

  Incidentally, along with the structure of the right side guiding passage 2590, as shown in FIG. 88 and FIG. The mounting holes 2113a are not provided up to the holes 2113a, and the mounting holes 2113a are provided in other regions of the panel plate 2100 which are not depressions.

  That is, the right hitting game area 2540 (the game area 5a on the right side of the center character 2500) is an area mainly used for playing when a so-called short-time function is activated. In such a game state, It is often required to progress the game stably and at high speed. In this respect, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game ball whose rolling speed is suppressed not only by the stopper 1006 but also by the step on the lower side flows down the right hitting game area 2540. As a result, it becomes difficult to cause variations in the probability of acceptance to the various receptacles in the right-handed game area 2540, and it is possible to improve the stability of the game in the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated. It will be.

  Here, the right hitting game area 2540 is sectioned and formed by the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500, the right rail 1005 of the panel decoration 1000, and the like, and it is up and down as the game area 5a on the right side of the center character 2500. And the dimension of the left-right direction has a space of a predetermined size sufficiently larger than the outside diameter of a game ball. The right hitting game area 2540 is an area from the lower side of the stop portion 1006 of the panel decoration 1000 to the vicinity of the second large winning opening 2006, and in addition to various receiving openings, the flowing direction of gaming balls such as obstacle nails Members that affect the

  In the right hitting game area 2540, a second start opening 2004, a gate unit 2003 and a second big winning opening 2006 are arranged as various receiving openings. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the upper right circulation space 2541. The gate unit 2003 is disposed below the second start port 2004. Below the gate unit 2003, a second big winning opening 2006 is arranged.

  The gate portion 2003 is provided to project slightly from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 to the front slightly below the second start opening 2004 and slightly below the middle of the decorative member 2545, and only one game ball is provided. It is formed to be able to pass in the vertical direction. A gate switch 2352 is attached to the gate unit 2003 for detecting passage of the game ball.

  The second starting port 2004 is formed to project forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 directly below the stopper portion 1006 of the panel decoration 1000 so as to open upward. In addition, the game ball received in the second start opening 2004 is detected by the start opening switch 3022 (second start opening switch), guided to the back side of the game board 5, and discharged.

  By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, complexity and enlargement of gaming machine components (characters, ball passages, etc.) have been achieved, and gaming machines capable of allowing more flexible design are developed. Is required. As described above, since the thickness of the panel board 2100 is thicker than that of the center part 2500, the space in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 1 becomes narrower as the game area 5a formed by the panel board 2100 increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom such as the arrangement of the gaming machine components may be reduced.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, both the left induction passage 2580 and the right induction passage 2590 are integrally formed of resin on the center character 2500 side. Thus, it is necessary to provide a ball passage in the upper portion on the panel plate 2100 side (need to secure a region extending from the outer rail 1001 to a length equal to or greater than the ball diameter in a state where the panel decoration 1000 is attached to the panel plate 2100 side) There is no flow path through which the game ball passes on the panel plate 2100 of the present embodiment. In the first place, since the margin portion 2113 is provided in the shape of a depression relative to the other area, it can not function as a flow path through which the game ball passes. Then, since the thickness of the flange portion 2511 of the center character 2500 can be made smaller than that of the panel plate 2100, the left (a position facing the outlet of the guide rail) to the right (a stopper portion) It becomes possible to give a sufficient depth to the entire area up to the position opposite to 1006), and it is possible to suitably secure a depth space on the upper side of the game board. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although it will be described later, it is possible to shift the movable area of the prize and the movable area of the liquid crystal in the depth direction in the upper part of the game board 5 .

  More specifically, the upper flange portion of the center character is attached to the margin portion 2113 formed on the panel plate 2100 in a covering manner. At this time, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the margin 2113 has a thin shape that can be screwed to attach the center character 2500. In the region other than the portion to be screwed, the margin 2113 itself may not necessarily exist.

  The flange 2511 of the center combination 2500 attached to the margin 2113 formed on the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 is combined with the outer rail 1001 and the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center combination 2500 with the left guide passage 2580 and the right guide passage 2590 Form both. At this time, the gaming balls passing through the left guide passage 2580 and the right guide passage 2590 are configured not to be in direct contact with the panel plate 2100 including the margin portion 2113.

  As described above, the margin 2113 is thinner than the other portions of the panel plate 2100, and as shown in FIG. 90, the margin 2113 and the flange 2511 of the center part are attached. In this state, the thickness is substantially the same as that of the other portions of the panel plate 2100. Therefore, when the game ball released from the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) moves from the game panel 2100 to the flange portion 2511 of the center role, the rolling becomes unstable due to the step or the like It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a collision with glass.

  On the other hand, when the ball entry rate of the game ball to the starting opening etc. is poor during the game, the player checks the release condition (speed, etc.) of the game ball from the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Is known to tend to be higher. However, hot effects are started on the liquid crystal display device 3600 at the timing at which the game balls are released from the guide rails (the outer rails 1001 and the inner rails 1002), or a movable character is moved in front of the center character 2500. There are many cases in which the effect by is started or the button effect is provided, and if there is a possibility that the effect of the effect is lost without noticing this, the amusement of the game may be lowered.

  In particular, when a junction between the center character 2500 and the panel plate 2100 is provided at a position facing the outlet (guide outlet) of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002), this junction The game balls from the rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) come into immediate contact with each other (the passage of the whole ball), so that the joint (the joint between the center character 2500 and the panel plate 2100) rattles with each shot. There is a concern that an adverse effect such as produced may be exerted, and furthermore, the frequency of checking the guidance exit by the player may be increased due to the deterioration in the pitch of the gaming ball.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the concave shape (margin portion 2113) is disposed at a position facing the outlet (guide outlet) of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) in the panel plate 2100. After forming, it was decided to provide the mounting holes 2113a in the facing depressions. Then, the flange portion 2511 of the center character 2500 is attached so as to fill the recess shape (margin portion 2113), and the flow path of the game ball is formed on the flange portion 2511 side, It is suppressed that a level | step difference arises in the said junction part (junction part of the center character 2500 and the panel board 2100), and it was made to screw in this position, so that the junction part ( Since it is difficult for rattle (unstable rolling of the game ball) to occur in the joint between the center character 2500 and the panel board 2100, the game ball is released from the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) It becomes possible to suppress the frequency of checking the condition, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment due to the loss of the presentation opportunity.

  Further, the flange portion 2511 of the center character 2500 is formed to a position facing the outlet (guide outlet) of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002), so that the depth space on the back side is It can be extended to the vicinity. As a result, the space for presentation can be expanded to the upper side of the pachinko machine, etc. Thus, the decrease in amusement of the game can be suppressed through a more flexible design and structure as a gaming machine.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the position where the flange portion 2511 of the center part 2500 and the outlet of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are opposed as shown in FIG. The left side of the visible region from the front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is on the left side. According to such a configuration, the screwed portion of the panel plate 2100 and the flange portion 2511 (a portion where the rendering space can not be created on the back side of the panel plate 2100) is driven to the left than the left end of the visible region of the liquid crystal display 3600. Will be able to This makes it possible to secure substantially the entire area on the upper side of the visible region of the liquid crystal display device 3600 as an arrangement space for characters, lamps, etc., and effects linked to the visible region of the liquid crystal display device 3600 near the guidance exit. By facilitating the design of the game, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the loss of the presentation opportunity.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), there is no section formed on the upper portion of the panel board 2100 for the passage of gaming balls. As described above, it is a structure in which a thin "circumferential portion 2113" smaller than the diameter of the game ball is defined by the outer rail 1001 when the panel decoration 1000 is attached.

  In this manner, the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 is formed as a thin "clad portion 2113" which is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the thin flange portion 2511 (center character 2500) placed on the front side By forming the flow path of the game ball, the depth space (rendering space) on the back side of the panel board 2100 can be extended to the back side of the game ball flow path in the upper part.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the area for one upper ball in the left guiding passage 2580 is a decorative member provided on the back side so as to be able to emit light. And the movable region of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, and they are provided so as to overlap with each other in a front view. In this manner, two different decorative movable parts (here, the decorative member provided to be able to emit light and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610) are arranged in the depth direction on the back side of the upper ball area in the left induction passage 2580 The reason why the space for overlapping and being arranged is made securable is that the upper portion of the panel board 2100 is formed as a thin "clad portion 2113" smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. It is clear.

  As described above, by forming the flange portion of the decorative object to the position facing the guide outlet, the depth space on the back surface side can be expanded to its maximum extent. Therefore, it becomes possible to arrange in the space an accessory, a lamp and the like to be provided for presentation, and it is possible to make it difficult to miss the presentation opportunity when confirming the vicinity of the guidance exit.

  That is, the player has a chance to gaze at the vicinity of the exit of the guide rail in order to adjust the firing of the game ball during the game, and in such a state, it tends to overlook the contents of the effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 3600. Become. In this respect, in the above configuration, the opening 2112 is enlarged to the vicinity of the exit of the guide rail, and a decoration member capable of providing a light emission effect in cooperation with the effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be disposed in the space. It is possible to prevent the effect produced by the liquid crystal display device 3600 from being overlooked while confirming the release state of the game balls near the exit of the guide rail.

  For example, the decorative member provided on the back side of the position opposite to the guide outlet (the outlet of the guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002)) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3600. If it is made to emit light when a rendition such as “(1)” appears, it is possible to enjoy the rendition without losing the operation opportunity of the upper dish effect button 257 etc. while confirming the vicinity of the exit of the guide rail.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), a thick portion and a thin portion are provided in the portion protruding from the panel decoration 1000 (outer rail 1001) in the upper portion of the panel plate 2100. And the mounting hole 2113a is to be provided in the thick part. About this thick part, it is desirable to provide in the upper center of panel board 2100. That is, in view of the formation of the opening in an arc shape, the upper center of the panel plate 2100 is positioned above the other area in the upper portion of the panel. And, in view of arranging the rectangular-shaped effect body (liquid crystal display device), even if the portion protruding from the panel decoration 1000 (outer rail 1001) in the upper part of the panel board 2100 is made thicker than other areas. Because it is difficult to connect to squeeze the depth space for arranging the effect. The thick portion may be formed larger than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  The panel plate 2100 may be a plate member instead of the transparent resin.

  According to this embodiment, as described above, the left guide passage 2580 and the right guide passage on the upstream side where the gaming balls guided to the game area 5a by the guide rails (the outer rails 1001 and the inner rails 1002) roll. Both induction passages with the induction passage 2590 are integrally formed with the flange portion 2511 at the top of the center work 2500. That is, the flange portion 2511 of the center character 2500 has the function of attaching to the panel board 2100 and the function of the guiding path of the left guiding path 2580 guiding the gaming ball to the left gaming area and the right guiding path 2590 guiding the gaming ball to the right gaming area. It is configured to have. Conventionally, it has been necessary to secure an area to be the flow path of the game ball and an area for installing the flange portion 2511 for attaching the center character 2500 to the upper portion of the panel board 2100 and both areas. For example, since it is not necessary to secure a flow passage through which game balls pass in the upper portion on the panel plate 2100 side, the flange portion 2511 of the center character 2500 can be brought close to the outer rail as much as possible. The opening 2112 for attaching the center character 2500 provided in the 2100 can be formed large. Accordingly, the space in the opening 2112 can be sufficiently secured and utilized, and the enlargement and complication of the structure disposed and driven in the opening 2112 can be realized.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the margin portion 2113, which is the area on the panel plate 2100 side where the flange portion 2511 is installed, is formed in a thin shape smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. That is, the opening 2112 of the panel plate 2100 is expanded to a position overlapping the attached flange 2511. Since the thickness of the flange 2511 of the center character 2500 is smaller than that of the panel plate 2100, the space in the depth direction of the rear space of the flange 2511 can be larger than the space in the depth direction of the panel 2100. That is, the range set as a guiding passage by the flange portion 2511 on the upper side of the game board (the entire range from the left of the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 (a position facing the outlet of the guide rail) to the right (a position facing the stopper 1006)) The space can be expanded up to the depth direction.

  In order to enlarge the opening 2112 of the panel plate 2100, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), the center part 2500 is positioned at a position facing the exit of the guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) at the top of the panel plate 2100. The flange portion 2511 is attached. However, when the flange 2511 of the center character 2500 is attached at a position facing the exit of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002), the thickness of the flange 2511 causes a step at the joint with the panel plate 2100. When the game ball strongly guided from the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) comes in contact with the step, the shooting direction changes, and depending on the changed direction, the glass covers the front of the game area The game ball collides and the glass is broken.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the panel plate covers the area from the position facing the exit of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) to the position facing the stopper 1006 in the upper portion of the panel plate 2100. A flange portion of the center combination 2500 in which a recessed portion shaped margin portion 2113 having a thickness smaller than that of the other region 2100 is formed, and both the leading portion 2113 and the right leading portion 2590 are formed. 2511 is attached in a covering form. Since the flange portion 2511 of the center character 2500 is formed to have the same thickness as the recess of the depression portion of the margin portion 2113, a step between it and another area of the panel plate 2100 when attached to the margin portion 2113 It can be constructed in a uniform manner without being born. Therefore, the flange portion 2511 can be attached to a position facing the outlet of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002), and the guide rail (the expansion of the rendering space) is achieved while the panel opening 2112 is enlarged. It becomes possible to reliably guide the launch direction of the gaming ball guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) along the guiding path.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, the panel board 2100 has a wide-shaped margin portion 2113 which is larger than the diameter of the game ball in addition to the narrow portion less than the diameter of the game ball Is provided in part. A mounting hole 2113 a for assembling the flange portion 2511 of the center part 2500 with a screw or the like is formed in a wide margin portion 2113. The flange portion 2511 of the center product 2500 can be assembled with a screw by securing the flange portion 2113 in a wide shape to secure strength.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled on the game board 5, the substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 2000 from the lower side. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 2000 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface It can be discharged downward from the discharge part.

5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 accommodates a payout control board 4110 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, a main control board 4100, and a power supply board for generating and supplying a control power supply to these boards. And a main control substrate box 1320 attached to the substrate holder 1200.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 4100 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81, 82 and 84. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the panel decoration 1000 outside the game area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player's side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on the control signal from the main control board 4100 to display the gaming state (game status), the normal lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

  The function display unit 1400 is not shown in detail but two LEDs based on the status display consisting of one LED for displaying the game status and the normal lottery result selected by passing the game ball against the gate unit 2003. The normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in the lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after fluctuating display of the normal symbol by blinking control of the normal symbol, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003 Of the two, a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of pending displays, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been established, and the acceptance of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2002 After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by Of the first special symbol display for displaying the LED of the first special lottery result in the lighting mode according to the first special lottery result, and of the variation display of the first special symbol pertaining to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 By the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of pending that is the number of the variable display that does not hold the start condition, and the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 (occurrence of start winning) The second special symbol is variably displayed by blinking control of eight LEDs based on the second special lottery result that has been drawn, and then the eight special LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result Among the variable display of the second special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the second display opening 2004, the symbol display and the number of holdings which is the number of the variable display for which the start condition of the variable display is not satisfied yet L When the second special hold number indicator consisting of D and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the number of repetitions of the opening and closing pattern of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 It mainly comprises a round indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying (the number of rounds).

  In the function display unit 1400, it is possible to display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 86. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 controls peripheral control board 4140 (see FIG. 131) for controlling effects to be presented to the player based on control signals from main control board 4100, and peripheral control board housing peripheral control board 4140. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling effect images (see FIG. 128). ).

[5-7. Liquid Crystal Display Device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 3600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81, 82, 84, and 85. The liquid crystal display device 3600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 2000. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 3600 is detachably attached to a rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the rear unit 3000. With the gaming board 5 assembled, the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the center character 2500. The liquid crystal display device 3600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  The liquid crystal display device 3600 of the present embodiment includes an upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. When each liquid crystal display device is at the reference position (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are positioned at the lowermost position), between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 A liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is disposed, and can move up and down independently of the liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620 or in conjunction with any of the liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620. The upper liquid crystal display device 3610, the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 are attached to a liquid crystal drive unit 3400 provided with an actuator (motor) for driving each of them. The liquid crystal drive unit 3400 is included in the back unit 3000. The operation modes of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 will be described later.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the entire configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 91 to 93. FIG. 91 (a) is a front view of the back unit, and FIG. 91 (b) is a back view of the back unit. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the game panel 2000, and as shown in FIG. 92 and FIG. Object unit 3700 (body drive unit) is provided with a front side character unit 3200 including features that constitute a head, an arm, a leg, etc. at the time of movable presentation by the object unit 3700 And a back side character unit 3300.

  As will be described later, in addition to the control units such as the main control board box 1320 and the peripheral control board box 1520, the back of the back unit 3000 (the back of the character unit 3300) according to this embodiment is A rear end decoration unit 3700 including an accessory movable forward from the space between the upper liquid crystal display 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display 3620 by moving at least one of the liquid crystal display 3610 or the lower liquid crystal display 3620 (Torso drive) is attached to the rear side.

[5-9a. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration unit 3100, where (a) is a back decoration upper unit 3110, (b) is a back decoration left unit 3120, and (c) is a back decoration lower unit 3130.

  The back decoration unit 3100 is a decoration member disposed behind the panel board 2100 of the game panel 2000 and behind the center character 2500, and the back decoration unit 3110, the back decoration left unit 3120, and the back decoration lower unit 3130 And are configured. Also, the back decoration unit 3100 can be viewed through the transparently formed panel plate 2100, and at the same time the player does not operate at least a part of the movable part provided in the front part unit 3200. It is provided to make it difficult to see from the

  Here, the back decoration upper unit 3110 is arranged to cover the upper side of the opening. In addition, the back decoration left unit 3120 is disposed from the center on the left side of the opening to the upper side. The lower back decoration unit 3130 is arranged to cover the entire lower side from the center on the left side of the opening.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 91, 92, 94 (c) and 95, the warp passage 3150 is formed in the back decoration lower unit 3130. FIG. 95 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the warp passage of the back unit. The warp passage 3150 is a flow path for guiding the game ball distributed to the warp inlet 2220 to the starting opening unit 2200 to flow down to the stage 2530 provided to the center product 2500. In this way, the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the warp passage 3150 can be enhanced by forming the back side of the panel board 2100 so that the gaming balls pass, instead of forming the warp passage in the center product 2500. That is, it is possible to arrange the warp entrance regardless of the shape of the center part 2500.

[5-9b. Front side character unit]
Next, the front side character unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the front character unit 3200, where (a) is a face drive unit 3210, a full burst drive unit (lower unit) 3230, (b) a shoulder drive unit 3220, (c) Is a full burst drive unit (lower part product) 3230, and (d) is a right taxiway 3250.

  The front side character unit 3200 is attached to the rear of the lining unit 3100, and includes a face driving unit 3210, a shoulder driving unit 3220, a full burst driving unit (lower character) 3230, and a right guiding path 3250. There is.

  Here, the face drive unit 3210 is configured by the left face portion 3210 a and the right face portion 3210 b as movable features, and further includes a drive mechanism including an actuator for driving these movable features. These movable roles and drive mechanisms are disposed on the back side of the back decoration upper unit 3110 in a state where a specific movable effect is not performed (during non-operation), and it is difficult to visually recognize from the player side On the other hand, in a state where a specific movable effect is executed (in operation), first, it moves downward and then moves in the center direction on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to the face of the robot Provided to form the Details of the effect by the face drive unit 3210 will be described later.

  The shoulder drive unit 3220 is configured of a left arm 3220 a and a right arm 3220 b, and further includes a drive mechanism including an actuator for driving these movable features. Similar to the face driving unit 3210, the shoulder driving unit 3220 is disposed at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize when the movable effect is not performed. Specifically, the left arm 3220a is disposed on the back side of the back decoration left unit 3120, and the right arm 3220b is disposed on the back of the decoration member 2545 provided on the center character 2500. At the time of effect execution, the left arm portion 3220a and the right arm portion 3220b move toward the center, and effects such as uniting with a rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit) described later are performed.

  The full burst drive unit 3230 is a production condition different from the production condition in which a specific movable effect is performed by the above-described drive units (face drive unit 3210, shoulder drive unit 3220, and rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit)). When the above condition is satisfied, it independently moves to the front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to perform rendering, and a drive mechanism including an actuator for driving the lower component.

  However, in the drive mechanism of the full burst drive unit 3230, the right side rail portion 3240 of the rail portions capable of sliding the lower part vertically is provided separately from the full burst drive unit 3230, The right guiding path 3250 is formed integrally with the right rail portion 3240 separately provided. As will be described later, the right side rail portion 3240 is disposed on the back side of the decorative member 2545 provided on the right side of the center character 2500, and the right guiding path 3250 is a rear side character unit 3300 described later. The game ball is received by the back box 3310 which is configured to be opposed to the back box 3310 and provided with a discharge passage between the back box 3310 and the reception port (for example, start opening etc.) in the right hitting game area 2540. Can be discharged from the game area 5a.

[5-9c. Rear side character unit]
Next, the rear side character unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the rear part product unit 3300 disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is a rear part product unit 3300 disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear It is a disassembled perspective view.

  The rear side character unit 3300 is attached to the rear of the front side character unit 3200, and includes a back box 3310, a liquid crystal drive unit 3400, and a rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit) in this order There is.

[5-9c-1. Back box]
First, the back box 3310 of the back side product unit 3300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 (a) is a front view of the back box 3310, and FIG. 99 (b) is a back view.

  The back box 3310 is in the form of a box whose front is open, and an opening 3311 which is squarely penetrated in the rear wall 3312 is formed. The opening 3311 is formed to have substantially the same size (or a slightly smaller size) as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3600. As described above, in the liquid crystal display device 3600, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 which can move the front side up and down is disposed, and the rear wall 3312 of the back box 3310 is in the movable range of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. At the same time, a stepped portion 3315 is formed. That is, in this case, while making the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 of the liquid crystal display device 3600 movable in the space secured by the step portion 3315, the rear wall 3312 is the peripheral edge (lateral side) of the liquid crystal display device 3600. Can be disposed in proximity to a drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) including an actuator for driving the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  That is, although the front character unit 3200 described above is disposed on the back side of the back decoration unit 3100 so as to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize from the player side, when it is visually recognized as if looking from the side, The existence is easily grasped. In this point, the driving mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is in close proximity to the rear wall 3312 to such an extent that the stepped portion 3315 is formed in accordance with the movable range of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. In addition, a liquid crystal display device 3600 is provided there to see from the side. Thus, at least when the liquid crystal display device 3600 is not driven, various members provided behind the rear wall 3312 including the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600. It is possible to conceal the presence of (the rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit) or the like) from the player side.

  Moreover, the rear wall 3312 according to this embodiment is a back box concealing portion that conceals the presence of the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600, the rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive portion), and the like. In addition to the function, a mounting portion (attachment hole or the like) of the front side character unit 3200 having a plurality of movable bodies (driving portions) is provided on the front side, and a support portion of the front side character unit 3200 It is supposed to work as well. According to such a configuration, visual recognition of the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) provided on the peripheral edge of the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be avoided without wasting the space in the depth direction.

  Thus, in addition to the front character unit 3200, the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit) are viewed from the front although the installation space is scarce in the depth direction. Can be divided appropriately into those to be visually recognized and those not to be visually recognized in front view.

  A face driving portion 3210 of the front side character unit 3200 is attached to a portion of the rear wall 3312 which is above the opening 3011 in a front view. In addition, a shoulder drive portion 3220 including a left arm portion and a right arm portion is attached to the center from the upper left end of the opening 3011 in the rear erection wall 3312 and the center from the upper end to the right in front view. In addition, a full burst driving unit 3230 is attached along the lower end and the lower side from the center on the left side of the opening 3011 in the rear erection wall 3312.

  Furthermore, in the back box 3310 according to this embodiment, the discharge passage is located in the vicinity of the front end of the lower right corner in the front view in the rear erection wall 3312 by facing the right rail portion 3240 (right guide path 3250). (A part that allows the gaming ball received by the entrance (for example, the starting opening etc.) in the right-handed playing area 2540 to flow downward and forms a passage leading to the lower right ball passage unit 3316 and further to the collecting pot It is provided. However, this discharge passage is also formed by utilizing at least a part of the space secured with the front character product unit 3200 by the step portion 3315, and the space in the depth direction is wasted It is not like doing.

  FIG. 100 is a view for explaining the mounting position of the right guiding path 3250 in the back box 3310. FIG. 101 is a transparent perspective view showing the shape of the right guiding path 3250. FIG. As shown in FIG. 101, as shown in FIG. 101, a rib portion 3251 is formed inside the right guiding path 3250 as shown in FIG. 101, and the passing speed of gaming balls flowing down the right guiding path 3250 can be reduced. It is supposed to be.

[5-9c-2. Liquid crystal drive unit]
Next, the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97, 98 and 102 to 110. FIG. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400. FIG. 103 (a) is a front view of the liquid crystal drive unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is located at the lowermost position, and FIG. 103 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line A-A. FIG. 104 (a) is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the lowermost position, and FIG. 104 (b) is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit excluding the liquid crystal decorative member. FIG. 105 (a) is a front view of the liquid crystal drive unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the top, and FIG. 105 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line A-A. FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the top, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit excluding the liquid crystal decorative member. FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the liquid crystal drive mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is located at the lowermost position, and FIG. 107 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line A-A. FIG. 108A is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is located at the lowermost position. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view of the liquid crystal drive mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the top, and FIG. 109 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA. FIG. 110A is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the top.

  As described above, the liquid crystal display device 3600 in the present embodiment is configured to include the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and is movable independently in the vertical direction. Further, the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 accommodates the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and includes a drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) including an actuator for moving each liquid crystal display device.

  Also, as described above, in the normal state in which the effect accompanied by the movement of the liquid crystal display device is not executed, a rectangular liquid crystal decorative member which is horizontally elongated between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3630 is disposed, and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 can move up and down independently or in conjunction with the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. As shown in FIG. 104, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 can conceal a gap or a frame portion generated between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620.

  The liquid crystal drive unit 3400 holds the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, and the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 moves the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 up and down by the control of the peripheral control substrate 4140, and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. A lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 that allows the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 to move the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 up and down by controlling the peripheral control substrate 4140; And a liquid crystal storage unit 3480 for housing the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440. A rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit) between the upper liquid crystal storage unit 3480 a housing the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 and the lower liquid crystal storage unit 3480 b housing the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 in the liquid crystal storage unit 3480 An opening 3480c is formed which can face the front decoration 3700a.

  The upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 biases the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411 supporting the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 having a large own weight upward in the assembled state of the game board 5 as its drive mechanism. Thus, an urging member 3412 that assists the upward movement of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a mechanism for moving the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 vertically by the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 are provided.

  Further, in the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410, guide rods 3413 slightly shorter than the height of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 are vertically disposed on both sides of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. The guide rods 3413 are inserted into bearing portions 3414 which are respectively formed at two upper and lower positions on the left and right sides of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411.

  As will be described later, the lower end of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411 is, as shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. A pressing portion 3418 is formed to move the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 provided on the lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440 side upward by pressing the same.

  Next, the drive mechanism of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 will be described. The upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 is attached to a motor housing portion 3485 formed on the right side of the upper liquid crystal housing portion 3480a of the liquid crystal housing portion 3480 in a front view, and a spur gear shaped upper liquid crystal drive gear 3420 is mounted on the rotation shaft ing. In addition, a large diameter spur gear shaped large diameter transmission gear 3421a meshing with the upper liquid crystal drive gear 3420 and a small diameter spur gear shaped small diameter transmission gear 3421b integrally rotating with the large diameter transmission gear 3445a Equipped with Furthermore, a spur gear transmission gear 3422 meshing with the small diameter transmission gear 3421 b of the upper liquid crystal transmission gear 3421 and a spur gear lift drive gear 3423 meshing with the transmission gear 3422 are provided. The elevation drive gear 3423 meshes with the rack gear 3416 formed on the right side of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411, and moves the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 up and down by the rotation of the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415. Further, a drive shaft disposed on the back surface side of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is coupled to the elevation drive gear 3423, and an elevation drive gear 3423 disposed on the left side in a front view is coupled to the drive shaft. The elevating drive gear 3423 engages with the rack gear 3416 formed on the left side of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411 to apply the driving force of the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 to move the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 up and down. .

  The lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 biases the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441 supporting the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 having a large own weight upward in the assembled state of the game board 5 as its drive mechanism. Thus, the liquid crystal display device 3620 is provided with a biasing member 3442 for assisting the upward movement of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and a mechanism for moving the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 up and down by the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445. Further, in the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, guide shafts 3443 having substantially the same length as the height of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are vertically disposed on both sides of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. The guide shaft 3443 is inserted through bearing portions 3444 formed at two locations, upper and lower, on the left and right sides of the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441.

  Next, a drive mechanism of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 will be described. The lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 is attached to a motor housing portion 3486 formed on the right side of the lower liquid crystal housing portion 3480b of the lower liquid crystal housing portion 3480 in a front view, There is. A lower liquid crystal transmission gear having a large diameter spur gear shaped large diameter transmission gear meshing with the lower liquid crystal drive gear and a small diameter spur gear shaped small diameter transmission gear integrally rotating with the large diameter transmission gear is provided. Further, it includes a spur gear transmission gear meshing with the small diameter transmission gear of the lower liquid crystal drive gear, and a spur gear lift driving gear meshing with the transmission gear. The elevation drive gear meshes with a rack gear 3446 formed on the right side of the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441, and moves the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 up and down by the rotation of the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445. Further, a drive shaft disposed on the rear surface side of the lower liquid crystal display is connected to the elevation drive gear, and an elevation drive gear disposed on the left side in a front view is coupled to the drive shaft. The raising and lowering drive gear can mesh with the rack gear 3446 formed on the left side of the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441 to apply the driving force of the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 to move the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 up and down.

  By the way, in a general drive motor, a stationary torque acts in a state where the coil is not excited. This stationary torque is called a detent torque, and when the detent torque is large, the force against the rotation of the drive motor is increased even if the rotation shaft of the drive motor is directly rotated, making it difficult to rotate. That is, the detent torque cooperates with the respective biasing forces by the biasing members 3412 and 3442 when power is not supplied to the drive motors 3415 and 3445 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hole. Thus, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 function to resist the force to move downward by their own weight.

  At this time, the composite value of the detent torque of the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 and the biasing force of the biasing member 3412 (a component of a direction component acting in the opposite direction to the own weight) of the downward force of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 due to its own weight. The upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 and the biasing member 3412 are provided such that the combined value of the forces) becomes larger or substantially the same. Also, similarly to this, the combined value of the detent torque of the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 and the biasing force of the biasing member 3442 (that works in the opposite direction to the own weight) than the downward force of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 due to its own weight. The lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 and the biasing member 3442 are provided such that the composite value of the force of the directional component is larger or substantially the same. And, even if the magnitude of the biasing force by the biasing member changes, such a relationship of force holds even when the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are at any position in the movable range. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by using such a principle, the upper liquid crystal display device having a relatively large weight can be provided without applying a driving force by the driving motors 3415 and 3445. A structure is adopted which allows the liquid crystal display 3620 and the lower liquid crystal display 3620 to stay at appropriate positions.

  However, on the other hand, when the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 is tilted (flat liquid crystal display surface is facing upward or downward), the force of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 acts. I will not do. At this time, even if the magnitude of the biasing force by the biasing member 3412 changes, the biasing force by the biasing member 3412 is larger than the detent torque regardless of the position of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 in the movable range. The upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 and the biasing member 3412 are provided to make it possible. Further, similarly to this, even if the magnitude of the biasing force by the biasing member 3442 changes, the biasing force by the biasing member 3442 is more than the detent torque regardless of the position of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in the movable range. The lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 and the biasing member 3442 are respectively provided to increase the Thus, in a state where the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 is tilted (a flat state where the liquid crystal display surface faces upward or downward), both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 reach the upper end in the movable range. It will move upward.

  In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the force to stay in place when the liquid crystal display device 3600 (here, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) is stationary. Is “A”, the force applied to the biasing toward the first position by the biasing member (here, the uppermost part in the movable region of the liquid crystal display 3600) “B”, the force by the weight of the liquid crystal display 3600 When the force of the directional component (downward in this case) against the above "B" is "C", the second position (here, the liquid crystal display) of the liquid crystal display device 3600 on the opposite side to the first position In the movable range from the first position to the second position in any of the range of movement from the first position to the second position while “B” tends to increase as the lowermost part in the movable region of 3600 is approached, “A <B Relationship is Despite standing up, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a hole, “A> B-C” is obtained regardless of where it is located in the movable range from the first position to the second position The relationship is established to be established.

  According to such a configuration, the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be kept stationary at any position within the movable range without necessarily receiving the driving force from the driving source. That is, in this case, regardless of the weight of the liquid crystal display 3600, the liquid crystal display 360 can be allowed to stand still for a relatively long time at a plurality of positions within the movable range. It will be expected to suppress the decline of the game fun through high stage design.

  However, in order to allow such a highly flexible effect design, it is important that the biasing force of the biasing member does not significantly deteriorate. In this respect, according to the above-described configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is simply arranged (for example, placed flat) so that its own weight does not act on the biasing force of the biasing member until the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hole. According to the relationship of A <B, the effect moving body naturally moves to the first position so that the biasing function by the biasing member can be automatically rested. As a result, the degradation of the biasing function is suppressed until the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall, and it is possible to provide a game under the above-mentioned highly flexible presentation design become.

  The detent torque can be changed by the drive source motor for moving the liquid crystal display device and the gear ratio of the gear engaged with the drive source motor. For example, when the motor rotates three times, the magnitude of the torque (= detent torque) is tripled if the gear ratio of meshing gear makes one rotation. In the present embodiment, since the liquid crystal display device has a large weight, the detent torque is relatively large because the gear ratio is high.

  The liquid crystal display device 3610, only when the liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620 are located at positions where the biasing force of the biasing member is maximized through the setting change of the detent torque or the setting change of the biasing force by the biasing member. The 3620 may move.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 111, a rotatable rotation member 3631 is provided at the center of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630, and a driving force is transmitted from an unshown motor through an endless belt provided on the back side of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630. The effect of rotating the rotating member 3631 is executed by the application. Further, guide portions 3630a extending downward from the outer side of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are integrally formed at the left and right ends of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 in a front view, and attached at the lower end to the lower end of the guide portion 3630a. A biasing member (spring) for biasing is connected. The guide portion 3630a can move up and down between the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the guide rod 3413. Further, a rack gear 3630b is formed inside the guide portion 3630a, and is engaged with a transmission gear 3451 described later to be movable in conjunction with the plate-like member 3450.

  A plate-like member 3450 is slidably disposed between the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the guide portion 3630 a of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 inside the lower liquid crystal holding member 3440. A guiding slit 3450a (see FIGS. 103 and 104) is formed in the plate member 3450, and a rack gear 3450b is formed on the back side of the guiding slit 3450a in a front view.

  A transmission gear 3451 is disposed in a guide slit 3450a formed in the plate-like member 3450, and is arranged so that the rack gear 3450b of the plate-like member 3450 and the rack gear 3630b of the guide portion 3630a mesh with each other. The plate-like member 3450 moves downward by pressing the upper end of the plate-like member 3450 to the pressing portions 3418 formed on both ends of the lower side of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411. At this time, the transmission gear 3451 engaged with the rack gear 3450b of the plate member 3450 is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack gear 3630b of the guide portion 3630a, whereby the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is moved upward. Thus, in the range where the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 is in contact with the plate member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, the displacement amount of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is larger than the displacement amount of the upper liquid crystal drive unit That is, it can be operated at high speed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the movable part (body drive part 3700) disposed behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 will be described later, but the movement of the liquid crystal display device 3600 starts. It is provided so as to be visible from the player side by being done. In addition, when the movement of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is finished and the effect space is generated, the liquid crystal display device 3600 is provided to be movable to the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 through the effect space.

  However, in order to realize such large-scale large-scale / complex movable effects (specific movable effects), it takes time for the sequential movement (switching) of the plurality of movable bodies, and the game interest is reversed. There is concern that it will For example, the movable part (body driving part 3700) disposed on the back of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is liquid crystal even if it becomes visible from the player side by starting the movement of the liquid crystal display device. Until the movement of the display device is completed and the rendering space is generated, it is not possible to move forward. Furthermore, even if the movement of the liquid crystal display device is started, the entire surface of the movable part (body drive part 3700) can not be viewed from the beginning unless the movement distance is sufficient.

  As described above, at the initial position (specific position), the liquid crystal decorative member (specific moving body) 3630 is the lower portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 (a region including at least the lower frame portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610) and the lower liquid crystal display As it is disposed at a position overlapping with both the upper portion of the device 3620 (the region including at least the upper frame portion of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620), the boundary between the two liquid crystal display devices can be concealed without discomfort.

  Then, when performing a specific movable effect using the movable part (body drive part 3700) disposed on the back of the liquid crystal display device 3600 when in such a state, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower part By moving the liquid crystal display devices 3620 in the direction away from each other, an effect space of the movable part (body driving part 3700) is generated.

  At this time, with the movement of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 also has a lower portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 (a region including at least the lower frame portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610) From the overlapping state, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 moves in a direction (downward direction) away from the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. However, as long as the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 is pressing the plate-like member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 itself is the upper The liquid crystal display device 3610 moves in a direction faster than the moving speed in the direction away from the liquid crystal display device 3610.

  According to the movement of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, when the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 start moving away from each other, the movable part (rear end of the liquid crystal display device 3600) When it becomes possible to generate the rendering space of the decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit) relatively quickly, and in turn realize a large-scale large and complex movable rendering (specific movable rendering), these movable bodies It will be avoided that it takes time to move in order. Also, after the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 start moving away from each other, the surface of the movable part (rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit)) behind them relatively quickly You will be able to expose the entire side.

  When the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 move away from each other and the pressing portion 3418 does not contact the plate member 3450, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 itself. Will move in a form that will be taken to this as it is. As described above, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is configured to change the moving speed stepwise in accordance with the progress of the effect (moving distance). In this embodiment, by adjusting the length of the plate-like member 3450, the range in which the speed at which the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 moves is high can be adjusted.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are moved by the same displacement amount in the same direction or in the same manner in accordance with the effects in the liquid crystal display device 3600. A movable effect that vibrates can be performed. However, in this case, control deviation occurs between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, or bounce occurs due to physical interference between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device. There is a concern that an unintended gap may occur between it and 3620. That is, in this case, since the rear end decoration unit 3700 secretly provided behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 becomes dewy, the game interest may be reduced. However, on the other hand, if the liquid crystal display device 3600 imposes an excessive restriction on the movement of the liquid crystal display device 3600 due to concerns about such problems, the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be provided with a drive mechanism to make it movable. There is a concern that the game interest will decline.

  In this respect, according to the above configuration, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is provided so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. Moreover, as long as the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 is pressing the plate-like member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display Since the device 3620 is provided so as to maintain a position to straddle the device 3620, even if an unintended gap is generated between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, this is suitably concealed. Will be able to As a result, it is possible to more positively execute the collaboration effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and thereby it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is made to be heavy on the movable decorative portion 3710 in a front view so that the movable decorative portion 3710 is hardly visible from the player side. The first effect state to be positioned, and the second to be displaced from the position at least when the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is in the first effect state so that the movable decoration portion 3710 can be easily viewed from the player side The plurality of movable targets so that the movable decorative portion 3710 is less likely to be visible from the player despite the fact that the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is displaced from the position where the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is in the first effect state. Of at least one of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 (here, both) together with the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 A third effect state may appear to be.

  And in this case, the player side is made to misunderstand that "the movable effect only to displace the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is only performed" by the generation of the first effect state and the third effect state. Later, it is possible to generate a second effect state. That is, in this case, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be made to appear in a form that reverses the above-mentioned recognition on the player side (only the movable effect that only the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is displaced is performed). It will be expected that the amusement effect will be improved by giving a feeling of surprise to the movable effect.

  According to such a configuration as the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the liquid crystal display device 3600 itself is not concerned that an unintended gap is generated between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. You will be able to actively boost the production by the movement. For example, it is desirable that the liquid crystal display device 3600 (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device 3620) move (such as vibration) in accordance with the movement of the effect image appearing in the display area.

  However, if the liquid crystal display device 3600 (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device 3620) is simply moved (vibrated), is the effect image in the display area merely moved (vibrated) or liquid crystal? It can be assumed that it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the display device 3600 is actually moving (vibration). Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 3600 (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device 3620) is moved (vibrated) according to the effect image in the display area, not only the liquid crystal display device 3600 but also the liquid crystal display device 3600 It is desirable that the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 provided on the front side be moved (vibrated) accordingly. Thus, not only can the movable decorative portion 3710 be concealed, but the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 provided close to the liquid crystal display device 3600 moves not only the effect image in the display area but also the liquid crystal display device 3600 itself. Will make it easier to realize that

  In the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, when the movable decorative portion 3710 is made to be easily visible from the player side, the moving direction of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 (even when the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 does not move) It is provided so as to move in the opposite direction (direction having the component) to the direction) and to contribute to the enlargement of the opening. As a result, since a relatively large movable decorative portion 3710 (opening) can be made to appear while suppressing the movable region of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, the liquid crystal display device 3600 can achieve such an object. It will be suppressed that pressure on the back side of the space can not be spared.

  Although described later, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is provided so that at least a part of the liquid crystal electrodes (frame portion) of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is not exposed. When the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is moved, the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is also moved together at a position where the liquid crystal electrodes (frame portion) are hidden. Also, the thickness of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is reduced to such an extent that another thick movable body (movable decorative portion 3710) can be advanced to the front side.

  When either the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 or the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 moves so as to cause the movable decorative portion 3710 to appear, at least a part of the frame portions of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is Dewed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest by making the presence of the frame part inconspicuous by performing the darkening effect in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 3600 before the frame part is exposed. desirable. At this time, if an effect is to be performed, it is difficult to notice the presence of the frame portion by performing an effect image (such as lightning) in which the black portion due to darkening occupies half or more of the area of the display area. Desirable.

  In the third effect state, the movable decorative portion 3710 on the rear side is concealed by moving both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. For example, the movable decorative portion The 3710 is disposed behind any of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and when only the liquid crystal display device on the disposed side is moved, the movable decorative portion on the back side The presence of the movable decorative portion 3710 may be concealed by moving the lens 3710 so as to follow this. However, in this case, the movable area of the movable decorative portion 3710 needs to be provided on the back side of the liquid crystal display device.

  According to such a configuration, the secrecy of the movable decorative portion 3710 can be maintained by special control such as moving the movable decorative portion 3710 even though the effect using the movable decorative portion 3710 is not performed. As a result, it becomes extremely difficult for the player to predict that the movable decorative portion 3710 is present on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. In this case, when moving the liquid crystal display device on the side on which the movable decorative portion 3710 is disposed, preparing the effect pattern that does not move the movable decorative portion 3710 allows the liquid crystal display device to be viewed from the player side. It appears that there are times when the movable decorative portion 3710 is present and when it does not exist behind the, and it is possible to attract the interest of the player and improve the operation.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 4140 performs the first effect state, the third effect state, within one fluctuation period when symbol variation is performed based on the result of the big hit determination when the specific effect condition is satisfied. It is desirable to be able to perform effect control that is generated in the order of the effect state and the second effect state. That is to say, in this case, after the player has misunderstood that “the movable effect only for displacing the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is performed” is falsely recognized by the first effect state and the third effect state. It becomes possible to generate an effect state. As a result, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be made to appear in a form that reverses the above-mentioned recognition on the player side (only the movable effect that only the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is displaced is performed). It will be expected that the sense of surprise will be given to the effect to improve the game interest.

  Even when the liquid crystal display device 3600 (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device 3620) moves, the movable decorative portion 3710 disposed behind by the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is not necessarily made to appear. In order to achieve the purpose, the movable decorative portion 3710 may not necessarily be moved or deformed back and forth.

  As described above, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 operates in conjunction with the movement of the liquid crystal display device, and it becomes possible to visually recognize the character or the like disposed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal display device without a sense of discomfort. It should be noted that after the movement of the liquid crystal display device, the characters arranged on the back side may be made visible only to the player without moving to the front, or a display such as a liquid crystal display may be arranged instead of the characters. It may be made for the player to visually recognize. Further, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 does not have to be disposed so as to overlap the boundary between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and may operate corresponding to the movement of the liquid crystal display device.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 (joint part) moves, a large and complicated movable effect can be obtained by performing an operation to make the predetermined effect on the rear side visually recognizable even a little faster. In order to realize the above, it will be suppressed that the switching takes time.

[5-9c-3. Back character unit (body drive unit)]
Subsequently, although a specific movable effect is executed based on the result of the big hit determination despite being disposed behind the liquid crystal display device 3600, the decoration portion (to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600) A rear end decorative object unit 3700 (body driving unit) that effects by moving the character) will be described. First, the structure of the rear end decoration unit 3700 will be mainly described. FIG. 112 (a) is a front view of the rear end decoration unit 3700, and FIG. 112 (b) is a rear view. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the rear end decoration unit 3700, in which (a) is in the initial state, and (b) is in a state in which the movable decoration 3710 is advanced. FIG. 114 is a view showing a state in which the rear end decorative object unit 3700 can be visually recognized by the movement of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 115 (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear end decorative portion 3708 disposed so as to lie behind the movable decorative portion 3710 of the rear end decorative unit 3700 is separated from the rear end decorative unit 3700. It is a figure, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the state where the back end decoration part 3708 was separated from the back side. In FIGS. 113 and 115, for convenience of explanation, the rear end decorative object unit 3700 is shown in a state where drive shafts 3734L and R described later are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the rear end decoration unit 3700 is arranged such that the movable decoration 3710 on the front face faces the opening 3480c formed in the liquid crystal storage unit 3480, and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 When at least one of the lower liquid crystal display devices 3620 moves away from the other, it can be viewed by the player from between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 through the opening 3480c. It has become.

  In order to make the movable decorative portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 visible, only the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 may be moved upward, or only the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may be moved downward. Alternatively, both the upper liquid crystal display 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display 3620 may be moved in a direction away from each other.

  Then, as a result of movement of the liquid crystal display device 3600 in this way, when a predetermined separation distance is created between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, advancing the movable decorative portion 3710 through the space therebetween become able to. Furthermore, as described later, when the movable decorative portion 3710 advances to a predetermined position, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be separated and deformed.

  The rear end decorative object unit 3700 according to this embodiment is, as shown in FIGS. 112, 113 and 115, a base portion 3701 which is provided so as to stand on the rear side in a front view, and a front view The movable member group X, which can be disposed on the upper side of the front surface of the base portion 3701 and can be positioned dynamically, and the lower portion of the front surface of the base portion 3701 in a front view, can be statically positioned. And a non-movable member group Y.

  The base portion 3701 is provided with game board attaching portions 3702 at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, and the rear end decoration unit 3700 is a rear face of the game board 5 by the game board attaching portion 3702 (the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 It is structured to be attached to the back surface side of the liquid crystal storage portion 3480.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 115, an opening is formed in the base 3701, and a rear end decoration 3708 is attached to close the opening. By attaching the rear end decorative portion 3708, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the rear end decorative portion 3708 provided so as to be further to the rear side of the movable decorative portion 3710 from the gap when the movable decorative portion 3710 advances. Will be visible from the player side.

  Further, the movable member group X is broadly divided into a movable decorative portion 3710 to which a predetermined decoration is given in a front view, and a support drive for supporting the movable decorative portion 3710 so as to be movable in the front and rear direction (depth direction). A portion 3740 is provided, and as shown together in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), these are all portions that can move in the front-rear direction.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 112, the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment includes an upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, a lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, an upper right movable decorative portion 3710c, and a lower right movable decorative portion 3710d. The position of the liquid crystal display device 3600 from the initial state placed behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 produces a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of a team to which a specific character belongs). ing. Therefore, according to the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment, the point in time when it can be seen from the player side through the opening 3480c from between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 In this case, a specific decoration has already been produced by the positional relationship between the plurality of movable decoration portions 3710a to 3710d.

  However, as described later, the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment produces a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of a team to which a specific character belongs), as described above, although this will be described later. The movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d are separated to temporarily destroy a specific decoration, and to position the decorative decoration 3710a to 3710d without any appearance of the decoration. Then, after that, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c are different from when generating a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of a team to which a specific character belongs). By positioning the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d, it is possible to provide an effect of newly creating one decoration different from the above specific decoration. That is, in this case, it is possible to conceal this until one decoration is newly generated, and it becomes possible to maintain the fun of the game by the appearance of the specific decoration from the time of its appearance.

  Further, the support drive unit 3740 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 includes a left support drive unit 3740 L which is a portion for movably supporting the upper left movable decorative portion 3710 a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710 b of the movable decorative portion 3710. A right support drive unit 3740R, which is a portion for movably supporting the upper right movable decoration 3710c and the lower right movable decoration 3710d of the movable decoration 3710, is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, a combination drive motor 3730a for operating the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b is disposed in the left support drive portion 3740L, and similarly, the right support drive portion 3740R. The combination drive motor 3730 b for operating the upper right movable decorative portion 3710 c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710 d is disposed.

  In addition, each combined drive motor 3730 is disposed outside the movable decorative portion 3710, and in a state where the movable decorative portion 3710 is not operating with the rear end decorative object unit 3700 attached to the game board 5, As shown in FIG. 114, the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 is positioned so as to be hidden by a rear wall 3312 of a back box 3310 disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 113B, a guide rod 3715 is attached to the upper side of the base portion 3701 in the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, a rod insertion portion 3741L is provided on the upper portion of the left support drive portion 3740L, and the rod insertion portion 3741L is slidably inserted into the guide rod 3715. Also, in the same manner, a rod insertion portion 3741R is provided on the upper portion of the right support drive portion 3740R, and the rod insertion portion 3741R is slidably inserted into the guide rod 3715.

  That is, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, the movement of the rod insertion portion 3741L inserted in the guide rod 3715 in the left and right direction in front view is the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b. The movement of the first left arm 3705L, which is moved in the depth direction, is converted to the movement of the first left arm 3705L, and the movement of the rod insertion portion 3741R inserted in the guide rod 3715 in the left and right direction in front view is the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right The movement of the movable decorative portion 3710d is converted into the movement of the first right arm 3705R for moving the movable decorative portion 3710d in the depth direction.

  With the above configuration, when the rod insertion portion 3741L and the rod insertion portion 3741R provided in the movable member group X are moved in the central direction toward each other by the forward drive motor 3720 provided in the non-movable member group Y, as shown in FIG. As shown, the movable fulcrum portion 3706 of the movable decorative portion 3710 advances so that the whole moves forward. Conversely, when the rod insertion portion 3741L and the rod insertion portion 3741R provided in the movable member group X are moved outward from each other by the forward drive motor 3720 provided in the non-movable member group Y, the movable decorative portion 3710 The movable fulcrum portion 3706 moves backward and the whole moves backward.

  However, although described later, in the rear end decorative object unit 3700 according to this embodiment, another movement independent of the movement of the movable decorative portion 3710 in the front-rear direction according to the driving force applied by the forward drive motor 3720 As a movement, it becomes a structure capable of causing the movement of the movable decorative portion 3710 in the front-rear direction according to the driving force applied by the uniting drive motor 3730 (left uniting drive motor 3730a, right uniting drive motor 3730b). ing.

  Further, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the electric wiring arranged with bending on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is drawn into the base portion 3701, The electric wiring is supplied to the movable decorative portion 3710 through the right support drive portion 3740R and the left support drive portion 3740L. The electrical wiring can be extended (stretchable) by the amount of bending, so that the movable decorative portion 3710 is electrically connected to the electrical wiring as described later. It can be moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  That is, although described later, although the rear end decoration unit 3700 can emit light in a state in which the movable decoration portion 3710 is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, the rear end in this state The movable decoration portion 3710 of the decoration unit 3700 is located in the space on the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600, while its drive mechanism (the base portion 3701, the right support drive portion 3740R, the left support The drive unit 3740 L and the like are positioned such that the space behind the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is at least used, and the drive mechanism portion on the rear side is drawn from the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. The movable decorative portion 3710 can emit light through the electrical wiring arranged in the following manner.

  According to such a configuration, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be moved or decorated by light emission using the drive mechanism portion and the electrical wiring that are difficult to be viewed from the player side by the liquid crystal display device 3600. become. That is, since it is suppressed that “contributing to the realization of the invisibility to the drive mechanism portion and the electric wiring” is suppressed in designing the role for the effect, it is Through the improvement of the degree of freedom in design, it can be expected to realize an effect capable of suppressing a decrease in game entertainment.

  In particular, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the drive mechanism portion and the electric wiring arranged in a form drawn in from the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 both move in the depth direction. Since it can be stored in the projection plane when the 3710 is viewed from the front, it contributes to the realization of the invisibility of the drive mechanism portion and the electrical wiring when designing the rendering purpose product. Will never be asked for.

  Subsequently, the operation mode of the rear end decoration unit 3700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. 116 shows an initial state, FIG. 117 shows a state in which the movable decorative part is advanced, FIG. 117 shows a state in which the left and right movable decorative parts are pivoted around the outer end, and FIG. It is a figure which shows a state. (A) of FIG. 116 to FIG. 119 is a top view, (b) is a front view, and (c) is a perspective view. Also, in FIGS. 116 to 119, for convenience of explanation, the cover portion of the base portion 3701, the rear end decoration portion 3708, the first left arm portion 3705L, the first right arm portion 3705R, and the movable decoration portion 3710 is omitted. The rear end decoration unit 3700 is shown in the state shown in FIG.

  A drive gear 3720a is attached to the rotation shaft of the forward drive motor 3720 for moving the movable decorative portion 3710 forward, and as shown in FIG. 116 (b), the drive gear 3725 is geared downward. Are engaged with the first rack gear 3721 which contributes to the sliding motion of the rod insertion portion 3741L and the second rack gear 3722 which is geared upward in the upper direction and contributes to the sliding motion of the rod insertion portion 3741R. There is.

  According to such a configuration, when the forward drive motor 3720 is driven (clockwise) in the state shown in FIGS. 116 (a) to (c), the rod insertion portion 3741L is in the right direction, and the rod insertion portion 3741R is Each slide in the left direction. That is, by thus moving in the central direction, which is an orientation toward each other, it is possible to shift to the states shown in FIGS. 117 (a) to (c) through the movement of the first left arm 3705L and the first right arm 3705R. As a result, the movable fulcrum portion 3706 of the movable decorative portion 3710 moves forward so that the whole moves forward.

  Conversely, in the state shown in FIGS. 117 (a) to (c), when the forward drive motor 3720 is reversely driven (left rotation), the rod insertion portion 3741L is in the left direction, and the rod insertion portion 3741R is in the right direction. Each comes to slide. That is, by thus moving in the outward direction, which is the direction away from each other, it is possible to shift to the states shown in FIGS. 116 (a) to (c) through the movement of the first left arm 3705L and the first right arm 3705R. As a result, the movable fulcrum portion 3706 of the movable decorative portion 3710 moves backward and the whole moves backward.

  As described above, the drive gear 3725 inserted and attached to the forward drive motor 3720 is engaged in parallel with the first rack gear 3721 cut in a downward direction and the second rack gear 3722 cut in an upward direction. By doing this, it is possible to move the second rack gear 3722 in the direction opposite to the direction in which the first rack gear 3721 moves.

  However, in the game machine, the effect by the movable role is easy to catch the player's eyes and it is expected to further enhance the interest, but the movable range of the function inside the game machine is easily predicted by the player, and the game is entertaining There is a concern that the

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the movement in the front-rear direction of the movable decorative portion 3710 is also caused by another movement (the combined drive motor 3730) independent of the movement by the forward drive motor 3720. It is possible to make the movement of the character and the character move out of the range of the player's expectation.

  That is, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, the support drive portions 3740 L and R that movably support the movable decoration portion 3710 in the front-rear direction (the depth direction) include the forward drive motor 3720. In addition to the first left arm 3705L and the first right arm 3705R (see FIG. 115) for transmitting the driving force, as shown in FIGS. 117 (a) to (c), the combination drive motors 3730a and b are used. A drive shaft 3734L, R is provided to transmit the driving force of the motor.

  Here, the drive shafts 3734L and R are provided behind the first left arm 3705L and the first right arm 3705R (see FIG. 115), and one end of the drive shafts 3734L and R is the combination drive motor 3730a, b. The gear portion 3736 L is formed as a gear portion 3733 L, R meshed with an appropriate gear that rotates in response to the drive of the gear portion, and the other end side thereof is linked to a drive mechanism provided inside the movable decorative portion 37 10 , R are formed as worm gears 3735L, R.

  Inside the movable decorative portion 3710, two drive mechanisms are provided as drive mechanisms linked to the gear portions 3736L and R, and the gear portions 3736L and R are first to be used in the first drive mechanism. It functions to apply a driving force of a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation amount). Then, when the driving force of a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation amount) is applied to the driving system of the first system, the movement of the driving system of the first system is locked, and this locked state is obtained. The driving force is applied to the driving mechanism of the second system when the driving force is further applied.

  In the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, the movable decoration in the state shown in FIGS. 117 (a) to (c) as the drive mechanism of the first system under such a drive principle. A drive mechanism is provided to deform the portion 3710 into the state shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (c).

  More specifically, when the united drive motors 3730a and 3730b are driven in the states shown in FIGS. 117 (a) to (c), first, the gear portions 3736L and R are rotated by the drive shafts 3734L and R, respectively. By receiving motion, they will rotate. The movement (rotation) of the gear portions 3736L and R is transmitted to the drive mechanism provided inside the movable decorative portion 3710, and finally, the gear portion 3737L provided on the side surface of the movable decorative portion 3710, R, 3738L, R, 3739L, R are sequentially rotated.

  That is, in this case, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b expose the drive mechanism on the inner left side by rotating the three gear portions 3737L, 3738L, 3739L (the counterclockwise as viewed from the front) It comes to turn in the direction of rotation and downward (clockwise in front view) respectively, whereby the state shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to (c) is entered. Also, similarly to this, when the three gear portions 3737R, 3738R, 3739R rotate, the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d expose the drive mechanism on the inner right side upward (front view Clockwise) and downward (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) respectively, whereby the state shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to (c) is entered.

  Then, when the state is shifted to the state shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (c) in this way, the movement of the drive mechanism of the first system is locked. However, as described above, if the drive force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b is continuously applied in this locked state, the drive force is applied to the drive system of the second system. The movable decorative portion 3710 in the state shown in 118 (a) to 118 (c) can be deformed to the state shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (c).

  The details of the drive system of the second system are omitted, but when the movement of the drive system of the first system is locked, the gear portions 3736L and R rotate the gear different from before. By applying the driving force to the drive system of the second system in the movable decorative portion 3710 by this, it is configured to be deformed to the state shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to (c). In this case, the upper side of the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c at the initial position, the lower surface of the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d face the player. That is, the rear end decoration unit 3700 can be transformed into a completely different mode by combining a decorative surface invisible to the player at the initial position.

  Conversely, when the united drive motors 3730a and 3730b are reversely driven in the states shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to (c), the state is shifted to the states shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to (c). It will be. Then, at the time of transition to the states shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to (c), the lock of the movement of the drive mechanism of the first system is released, and the combination drive motors 3730a and b are further reversely driven. If it continues, it will be further transferred to the state shown in FIGS. 117 (a) to (c).

  According to such a configuration, when transitioning from the states shown in FIGS. 117 (a) to 117 (c) to the states shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (c), a specific decoration (here, Each of the movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d, which has produced a design that is a symbol of a team to which a specific character belongs, is separated and the specific decoration is broken once. Moreover, in the state shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (c), each of the movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d not only causes any decoration to appear but also an internal drive mechanism that has been concealed by their cover portion. The production situation is produced as if it failed in success or failure in the movable production such as making it dew.

  Then, in the states shown in FIGS. 118 (a)-(c), the state shown in FIGS. 119 (a)-(c) is produced after the rendering situation as if reducing the sense of expectation to the jackpot is generated. The movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d are positioned so as to newly create one decoration different from the above specific decoration. That is, in this case, the player's expectation is that he reverses the preconception of being an object that forms a specific decoration at the time of its initial appearance, and that a new decoration different from this is created without returning to the specific decoration. It will be possible to provide feature presentation that exceeds.

  In this case, in order to preferably improve the amusement of the game, the degree of expectation to the jackpot is better when newly creating a different decoration than when appearing in a specific decoration at the time of initial appearance Should be high.

  Further, according to the above configuration, the movable decorative portion 3710 moves in the back and forth direction (the depth direction) by the forward drive motor 3720 (a state shown in FIGS. 116 (a) to (c); Motion that moves in the front-rear direction (depth direction) by the combination drive motors 3730a and b separately from movement in the front-rear direction using movement from the state shown in (c) to (c) (FIG. 117 (a) A structure capable of causing the movement shown in (c) to (c) and the movement shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to (c) to independently appear. It is done.

  That is, in this case, for example, when the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced in the specific direction (for example, the forward direction) by the driving force from the united drive motor 3730a, b, the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720. It also becomes possible to displace itself in a direction (for example, the backward direction) opposite to the specific direction. That is, in this case, the movable decorative portion 3710 can continue to be displaced in the specific direction (for example, the forward direction) to a degree beyond the range which can be assumed from the limited effect space, so the assumption is exceeded. It is expected that the reduction of the game entertainment will be suppressed through the realization of a large movable effect.

  More specifically, the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment is provided to be displaceable in the depth direction, but only the distance to the glass plate 564 is left on the front side thereof. If it exceeds, the glass plate 564 will collide. Therefore, from the player's side, even if the movable decorative portion 3710 moves forward, it is expected that the movable decorative portion 3710 is limited to that range. However, the driving force from the united drive motor 3730a, b is used. When the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced in the forward direction, the movable decorative portion 3710 itself is displaced by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720 in a direction (for example, the backward direction) opposite to the specific direction. For example, the driving force from the combined drive motors 3730a, b makes it appear as if the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced in the forward direction to an extent beyond the expectation.

  In fact, in this pachinko machine 1, when transitioning from the states shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to (c) to the states shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to (c), the combination drive motors 3730a and b are used. At the same time as the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced in the forward direction by the driving force from the direction, the movable decorative portion 3710 itself is reverse to the specific direction by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720 (for example, backward direction) It is also displaced. As a result, a large feature presentation can be realized even in a limited presentation space.

  Further, in the example according to this embodiment, the movable decorative portion 3710 closer to the player is shown to be moved to the front side largely by deformation of itself, so that it is behind and fronted. At the same time, the first left arm 3705L and the first right arm 3705R, which are difficult to visually recognize, are secretly and simultaneously moved backward. Therefore, it is possible to provide feature presentation as if it would exceed the limit in a limited presentation space while making it difficult for the player to grasp the backward movement.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the rear end decoration unit 3700 is a liquid crystal display device under the relationship of “A> B”, “A> C”, and “A <B + C” respectively. When the distance (length) from the front surface of the movable decorative portion 3710 to the glass plate 564 is “A” when positioned on the rear side of the 3600 (the position shown in FIG. 84 (b)) When receiving the driving force from 3730a and 3730b, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be displaced over the length of "B" at the maximum in the depth direction (here, the front direction) and receives the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720 In this case, the movable decorative portion 3710 is provided so as to be displaceable over the length of “C” at the maximum in the depth direction (here, the front direction).

  In this respect, when moving the movable decorative portion 3710 based on the result of the jackpot determination, the peripheral control board 4140 moves in the depth direction (here, the front direction) of the movable decorative portion 3710 by the driving force from the united drive motors 3730a and b. And the displacement of the movable decorative portion 3710 in the depth direction (here, the front direction) due to the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720 is at most “B + C” which is larger than “A”. Within the range in which the total value does not exceed "A" while the movable structure is realized, in the depth direction (here, the front direction) of the movable decorative portion 3710 by the driving force from the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b. Control for the displacement of the movable decorative portion 3710 by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720, and control for the displacement in the depth direction (here, the front direction). Re so that respectively perform.

  According to such a configuration, when a plurality of drive sources are simultaneously used, a large movement which does not fit in the effect space is allowed, and each drive source alone does not feel cramped due to effects which are contained in the effect space. At the same time, the dynamic movable effect is realized as if exceeding the conventional limit in the effect space through appropriate control for each driving amount, so that the fun of the game can be improved. It will be.

  The peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment uses only the combined drive motor 3730a, b of the combined drive motor 3730a, b and the forward drive motor 3720 based on the result of the big hit determination, and the movable decorative portion 3710 The motion of the movable decorative portion 3710 is caused to appear by using only the forward drive motor 3720 when the motion of the movable decorative portion 3710 is caused to appear. The degree of expectation obtained is different. At this time, in the case where only the forward drive motor 3720 is used to cause the motion of the movable decorative portion 3710 to appear in the depth direction, the movable decorative portion 3710 is extended over the maximum length "B" in the depth direction (here, the front direction). It is possible to show the effect pattern that displaces the.

  However, even when motion in the depth direction of the movable decorative portion 3710 appears using only the combined drive motors 3730a and 3130b, the movable decorative portion can extend over the maximum length of "A" in the depth direction (here, the front direction). An effect pattern for displacing 3710 may be allowed to appear.

  By making it possible to cause the effect mode using only one of such combined drive motors 3730a, 3b and forward drive motor 3720 to appear, both combined drive motors 3730a, b and forward drive motor 3720 are simultaneously driven. If this is done, it will be possible to provide a thrilling feeling that it will not fit within the presentation space.

  That is, when the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced in a specific direction using only one of the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b and the forward drive motor 3720 (a single movable effect), the movable effect of a size that fits within a predetermined finite space Will appear ("A> B", "A> C"). However, by providing such a single movable effect, “when the driving force is applied from both of the combined drive motor 3730a, b and the second forward drive motor 3720, it does not fit within a predetermined finite space, It is possible to make the player feel the sense that "a large-scale movable effect beyond the limit may appear" ("A <B + C").

  Then, on this, in the case where the driving force is applied from both the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b and the second forward drive motor 3720, the range where the predetermined finite space is not exceeded (the total value is "A" Control in the specific direction of the movable decorative portion 3710 by the driving force from the combined drive motor 3730a, b), and the movable decoration by the driving force from the second forward drive motor 3720). The control related to the displacement of the portion 3710 in the specific direction is performed. That is to say, in this case, it becomes possible to provide an entertaining movable effect as if to break through a predetermined limited space, and this makes it possible to suppress a decrease in game fun.

  By the way, in recent years, the enlargement of the display area of the effect display device has progressed, and even the player side has come to touch such large-scale effects with a sense of mannerism, and the large-sized display area alone is for entertaining It is difficult to contribute to maintenance. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the total area of the display area visible on the front view (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the liquid crystal display device 3610) when the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination. The control is performed to intentionally reduce the area obtained by adding each display area of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 which is made visible. According to such a configuration, in a state in which the total area of the display area is not reduced, it is possible to feel the feeling that a relatively large display effect is being performed. It will be possible to expect maintenance of the game entertainment when in the state.

  However, in this case, in a state in which the total area of the display area visible in front view is reduced, it is possible to realize that only a relatively small display effect can be performed, There is a concern about the decline in gaming entertainment. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the total area of the display area visible in front view is reduced, the total area of the display area is utilized utilizing the space created by the reduction. The movable decorative portion 3710 of the rear end decorative object unit 3700, which does not appear when the value is relatively large, is moved forward of the display area by performing "representation by a movable combination" described below, thereby enabling visual recognition in front view The game entertainment when the total area of the display area to be displayed is reduced is also preferably maintained.

  The liquid crystal display device 3600 (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device 3620) reduces the display area that can be viewed by itself, in order to obtain the above-described effects as the "effect by movable movable object" described below. Is required to move. As described above, the liquid crystal display device 3600 is made to show a movement to intentionally reduce the display area, thereby making it possible to make the player feel that only relatively small display effects can be performed. Will be expected.

[5-10. Directed by a movable role]
Next, movable effects including effects by the rear end decorative object unit 3700 (body drive unit) in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 120 to 129. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a state before execution of the movable effect. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a state in which the upper liquid crystal display device is moved and the trunk drive unit can be viewed by the player. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the state of the trunk drive unit in the state shown in FIG. 121. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a state in which the movable decorative portion of the body drive portion has advanced. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an aspect of the trunk drive unit in the state shown in FIG. 123. FIG. 125 is a view showing a state in which the movable decorative portion of the body drive portion is separated. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an aspect of the trunk drive unit in the state shown in FIG. 125. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a state in which the deformation of the movable decorative portion of the body drive portion is completed. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an aspect of the trunk drive unit in the state shown in FIG. 127. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a state in which the combination product of the front character combination unit is united with the movable decorative portion after the deformation is completed, and the united effect is completed.

  Now, assuming that the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination by the main control MPU 4100a, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines to execute the control according to the specific movable rendering using the rear end decoration unit 3700. I do.

  However, in the normal state in which a specific movable effect is not performed, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 120, the rear end decoration unit 3700 is a liquid crystal so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the existence thereof. It is provided behind the display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), when the player looks in from the side or the upper side, the front character unit 3200 (face drive unit 3210) The shoulder drive unit 3220, full burst drive unit (lower part product 3230, right guiding path 3250, etc.) can be grasped for their existence, while the rear end decoration unit 3700, upper liquid crystal display device The driving mechanism of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 can not be sensed even by the liquid crystal display device 3600, the rear wall 3312, and the like.

  That is, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by using such a structure, the effect space is expanded in the depth direction, and then multiple multiplexes by a plurality of decorative objects arranged to be hidden in the depth direction As a dynamic effect, it is possible to realize the progress of the effect to make the player's gaze gradually point in the depth direction, or it is huge and powerful that can not be realized at all only with the effect space on the front side of the liquid crystal display 3600. It enables the player to enjoy the feature presentation without missing the game.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4150a first executes control relating to a specific movable effect using the rear end decoration unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 121, at least at least the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. One is moved in a direction away from each other, and control is performed to reduce the total area of the display area visible in front view. Thereby, the movable decorative portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 is directed to the front side between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 by using a space corresponding to a reduction in the total area of the display area. It is possible to create a production space that can only move.

  Thus, when the effect space is created, the movable decorative portion 3710 of the rear end decorative object unit 3700 positioned behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be viewed from the player side. As a result, the effect of gradually turning the player's gaze in the depth direction is firstly developed. In this state, the driving force is still applied to the movable decorative portion 3710 (upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, upper right movable decorative portion 3710c, lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, lower right movable decorative portion 3710d) of the rear end decorative object unit 3700. It is made to maintain this in the state shown by FIG. 122 (a)-(d), without giving.

  However, although the driving force is not yet applied to any of the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, The upper right movable decorative portion 3710c, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are disposed in a positional relationship that produces a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of a team to which a specific character belongs) It is as having mentioned above.

  Since the effect space produced in this way determines the size of the movable decorative portion 3710 itself which moves forward, it is required to produce a larger effect space. However, on the other hand, since the display area of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is reduced by an amount corresponding to the enlargement of the rendering space, it has moved to the front side through the rendering space although it is a small rendering space It is desirable to achieve a large feature presentation by decoration.

  In this respect, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, as described above, the rear end decoration unit 3700 is provided with a structure that can meet such a request. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the movable decorative portion 3710 of the rear end decorative unit 3700 according to this embodiment has a thickness of the liquid crystal display device 3600 or a liquid crystal decorative member 3630 provided in front thereof. A thick portion is provided, and the thick portion of the movable decorative portion 3710 having such a thick portion is realized as a movable effect to face the player.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a drives the forward drive motor 3720 (right rotation) in the state that the rendering space is thus generated, as shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the movable decorative portion 3710. It moves itself forward. By moving the movable decorative portion 3710 itself to the front side in this way, the rear end decorative portion 3708 disposed so as to be further behind the movable decorative portion 3710 is slightly viewed from the player side As a result, the second effect of directing the player's gaze in the depth direction is gradually developed.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs control such that the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced forward over the maximum length "B" when only the forward drive motor 3720 is used, whereby the combination drive motor 3730a, b is generated. When drive control using the is further performed, it is intended to give a pounding feeling that the limit of the rendering space may be exceeded.

  However, the movable decorative portion 3710 does not necessarily have to be displaced forward over the maximum length of “B”, and the entire movable decorative portion 3710 is on the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 or the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 If the forward drive motor 3720 is at least driven (right rotation) to a position where it is fully extended, a specific movable effect can be realized.

  That is, peripheral control MPU 4150a drives combined drive motors 3730a and b in a state where the entire movable decorative portion 3710 is thus completely protruded to the front side of the display surface of liquid crystal display device 3600 and liquid crystal decorative member 3630. By doing this, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the upper liquid crystal in which the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are separated from each other. The display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are positioned so as to cross each other in a front view.

  According to such a configuration, the movable decorative portion 3710 which is an entity is as if divided between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 which can be displayed so as to straddle a specific effect image. While the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a front view, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 can be positioned. It is possible to realize the linked effect by the movable decorative portion 3710 that functions to connect these even in the state where they are away from each other, and to allow the player to grasp that the linked effect is performed .

  In the state shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are front faces with respect to the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. It will be positioned so as to overlap each other visually.

  That is, in a period before the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is lower than the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in the region on the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600. Since they are operated in conjunction with each other or in a mode as shown in FIG. 111, from the player's side, such a movable region of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is permitted to operate as a feature effect Seems to be a staging space. Nevertheless, the movable decorative portion 3710 should move to a space on the front side that has not been recognized so far and has not been recognized as a rendering space, as if to defeat such an acceptable rendering space. Thus, the positional relationship between the movable decorative portion 3710 and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is reversed. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect beyond the assumption of the player, such as "How much does it move toward the player?"

  In addition, even if the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved to the unused area in this way, the positional relationship in the depth direction is difficult to grasp in a front view, so this is not grasped by the player, and the above is mentioned. Although it may be feared that the effect is not sufficiently exerted, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710 a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710 b and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710 c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710 d face the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 in front. These concerns can be suitably eliminated by making them overlap each other visually.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 123 and FIG. 124, the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned on the front side so that most of the movable decorative portion 3710 overlaps the rear end decorative portion 3708 disposed in the far end in front view Nevertheless, in the state shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the movable decorative portion 3710 moves (deforms) in such a manner as to reduce a portion overlapping with the rear end decorative portion 3708 in a front view. As a result, the rear end decorative portion 3708 disposed so as to be further behind the movable decorative portion 3710 can be easily viewed from the player side, and effects are made to gradually direct the player's gaze in the depth direction Will be advanced third.

  Also, in such a state, each of the movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d that has produced a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of a team to which a specific character belongs) is separated and the specific decoration is broken once In addition to the appearance of any decoration, in addition to the appearance of the internal drive mechanism that was hidden by the cover part is exposed, it produces the production situation as if it failed in success or failure in the movable production. It is as mentioned above.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b continue to drive even after producing the presentation situation as if the success or failure in the movable presentation has failed, as shown in FIGS. As shown in 128, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable in a manner different from when generating a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of a team to which a specific character belongs) By positioning the decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d, one decoration (here, the body of the robot) different from the above specific decoration is newly created.

  More specifically, the upper surfaces of the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c at the initial position face the lower surfaces of the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d toward the player. By doing this, a decoration (here, the body of the robot) different from the above specific decoration is newly created.

  According to such a configuration, by combining a decorative surface which can not be viewed by the player at the initial position, a completely different shape and a completely different decoration will appear, thereby achieving an effect exceeding the player's assumption. You will be able to The upper surfaces of the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c at the initial position and the lower surfaces of the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are shown in FIG. 84 (b). It is a part related to the thick part, and by realizing the movable presentation in such a part, a large role is achieved by the decoration that has been moved forward through the presentation space though it is a small presentation space It will be possible to realize the effect. In fact, the robot body shown in FIG. 127 (a) is configured by arranging two thick portions of the movable decorative portion 3710, and the width is the upper liquid crystal display 3610 and the lower liquid crystal. The width is larger than the vertical width of the space provided between the display devices 3620, and the area is also larger than the opening area of the space.

  When the state shown in FIGS. 125 and 126 is shifted to the states shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the movable decorative portion 3710 is further moved forward by the combination drive motors 3730a and b. It becomes. However, at this time, since the movable decorative portion 3710 has already moved forward along the maximum length "B" when using the forward drive motor 3720, when using the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b. It can not be moved further forward over the maximum "C" length of. Nevertheless, in order to form the robot's body, it is necessary to further move it forward over the maximum "C" length when using the combined drive motors 3730a, b, Since a collision with the glass plate 564 can not be avoided, from the player's side, the drive by the forward drive motor 3720 has been performed to such an extent that a specific movable effect can not be realized, and the drive is It will look as if you are announcing that a particular moveable rendition will not be realized.

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can realize a large movable effect even in such a limited space by simultaneously driving the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b and the reverse drive of the forward drive motor 3720. It is like that.

  Also, in the state shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the movable decorative portion 3710 overlaps the rear end decorative portion 3708 disposed in the farthest position when it is in the state shown in FIGS. 125 and 126. The movable decorative portion 3710 is moved (deformed) so as to expose a portion which is located in the lower part of the display and is difficult to be visually recognized. As a result, the portion of the rear end decorative portion 3708 disposed so as to be further behind the movable decorative portion 3710, which is difficult to be visually recognized, can be easily viewed from the player side, gradually in the depth direction. The fourth effect is to make the player direct the gaze of the player.

  Then, after the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the movable body 3710 to appear on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 by the movable decorative portion 3710, as shown in FIG. 129, the face driver 3210 (left face 3210a and right By moving the face 3210b) and the shoulder drive 3220 (left arm 3220a, right arm 3220b) in a direction to approach the robot torso so as to form the face and the shoulder of the robot, respectively, the liquid crystal display A specific moveable effect that causes a large robot to appear on the front side of the device 3600 is performed.

  The procedure for the face drive unit 3210, the shoulder drive unit 3220, and the movable decorative unit 3710 to return to their initial positions after the appearance of a large robot in this way is exactly the reverse of the case where it appeared, first of all, The part 3210 and the shoulder drive part 3220 will move away from the robot body (movable decorative part 3710) and return to the initial position. Thereafter, the movable decorative portion 3710 is changed from the state shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the state shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the state shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, and the state shown in FIGS. 121 and 122. The specific movable effects are ended by moving them closer to one another so that the effect space between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 disappears after sequentially shifting to .

  According to such a specific movable effect, the decoration (face drive unit 3210, shoulder drive unit 3220) disposed at the initial position in the front space of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the back space of the liquid crystal display device 3600 In the state in which all the decorations (movable decorations 3710) disposed at the initial position are located in the front space of the liquid crystal display device 3600, one decoration (robot) is produced by the positional relationship between the two. That is, in this case, the space on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 also contributes to the feature effect rendering realized on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and contributes to the enlargement thereof. In the front space of the liquid crystal display 3600, it is possible to realize a large-scale (including the thickness of the appearing decoration) feature presentation that can not be realized only by the members in the front space. Note that the decoration (robot) appearing in this manner is thicker than the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  In addition, after the rendering space is thus expanded in the depth direction, the front decorative object (face drive unit 3210, shoulder drive unit 3220) located on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 At least one of the rear decorative objects (the movable decorative portion 3710) located in is moved in the depth direction and cooperates to perform a predetermined decorative effect (the appearance of a robot) when approaching each other, It becomes possible to realize a movable effect with a three-dimensional effect using the movement in the depth direction, and it is possible to expect the suppression of the decrease in the game entertainment.

  In addition, such movement in the depth direction is sufficient if there is a component in the depth direction, for example, moves in directions approaching each other by moving diagonally to the setting side, and cooperates and predetermined ornament effects when approaching each other May be performed.

  Further, in such a specific movable effect, the movable decorative portion 3710 disposed so as to be hidden behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 is prepared, and the movable decorative portion 3710 and the liquid crystal display device 3600 are moved. The movable decorative portion 3710 pops out to a region on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to make it possible to perform an effect in which a specific decorative shape (body portion) is exposed. Therefore, in the area on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, even if the arrangement space for the rendering aids is scarce, the decorative object (face drive unit 3210 (left face portion 3210a and right Allowing the movable decorative portion 3710 having a shape (specific decoration shape) different from the portion 3210 b) and the shoulder drive portion 3220 (left arm 3220 a, right arm 3220 b) to suddenly appear from the rear side of the liquid crystal display 3600 As a result, novel effects that can not be recalled by such a player can be expected to suppress the decline in game interest.

  In addition, as a condition (predetermined effect condition) where such a specific movable effect appears, for example, that a specific change pattern is selected in the special symbol change pattern setting process, or the execution of the jackpot game is started It is possible to adopt conditions such as, etc. Here, when it is assumed that the specific fluctuation pattern is selected as the effect condition, the specific movable effect is started and ended between the start and the end of the change of the special symbol. Thus, when it is considered as an effect condition that the execution of the jackpot game is started, a specific movable effect is started and ended during the execution period of the jackpot game.

  In addition, the large-scale feature effect to be realized in this manner may be such that it covers the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  In addition, the decorations (the left face 3210a, the right face 3210b, the left arm 3220a, and the right arm 3220b) disposed in the area on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 are not necessarily the whole. Does not have to be on the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600, and at least a part of the specific part is on the front side of the display surface, and the decoration appeared by the specific part and the movable decorative portion 3710 is the liquid crystal display device 3600 The liquid crystal effect presentation on a large scale (including the thickness of the appearing decoration) that can not be realized only by the members in the space on the front side of the liquid crystal display 3600 if it appears on the front side of the display surface This can be realized in the front space of the display device 3600.

  In addition, the decorations (the left face 3210a, the right face 3210b, the left arm 3220a, and the right arm 3220b) disposed in the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 are not driven. Even in the state (initial position), at least a part of the display surface may be in front of the display surface.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the movable decorative portion 3710 is disposed behind the liquid crystal display device 3600, and the movable decorative portion 3710 of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is viewed from the front. It is made to provide with the structure made it possible to make it easy to visually recognize in front view from the state which is hard to visually recognize. Then, when the movable decorative portion 3710 is made easy to visually recognize in a front view, a specific character effect presentation using the movable decorative portion 3710 which has been difficult to visually recognize until then and a decorative object provided separately from this Since it is possible to perform, it becomes possible to realize a more powerful feature presentation, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the game entertainment.

  Further, according to the specific movable effect, the whole of the specific portion (movable decorative portion 3710) of the rear end decorative object unit 3700 disposed behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 is the liquid crystal display device 3600. When the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the initial state shown in FIG. 120) to move the movable decorative portion 3710 so as to protrude to the front side more than the front side, and the movable decorative portion The movable decorative portion 3710 and the liquid crystal display device 3600 are viewed from the front in any state where the portion 3710 is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and effects are performed (representation state shown in FIG. 129). They are positioned to overlap each other.

  That is, in this case, the movable decorative portion 3710 hidden behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 moves to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to hide at least a part of the liquid crystal display device 3600 in reverse. In such a position as taking a look, a feature effect is produced in cooperation with another decoration (face drive unit 3210, shoulder drive unit 3220). As a result, the player's gaze is transferred from the liquid crystal display device 3600 located at the position hiding the movable decoration portion 3710 to the movable decoration portion 3710 located at the position hiding the liquid crystal display device 3600. The player can enjoy a huge and powerful feature presentation such as can not be realized at all only with the presentation space on the front side of the above.

  In this manner, the movable decorative portion 3710 hides at least a part of the liquid crystal display device 3600 as if taking away the gaze of the player, so even during the period in which the specific movable effect is performed. In the liquid crystal display device 3600 in which the total area of the display area visible in front view is reduced without considering the possibility that the player misses the feature effect, the effect by the display on the liquid crystal display device 3600 is aggressively performed. Will be able to do. In addition, as a display effect in the period when such a specific movable effect is performed, an effect (a display for causing a dark transition or a light to run) is displayed to enhance the interest when the feature effect is performed by the movable decorative portion 3710 Something like that is desirable. Further, at this time, if one coordinated display effect such as spanning the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is performed, the movable decorative portion 3710 breaks the one display effect from the rear side and It will be possible to provide a novel rendition as if it had moved to the front side.

  However, it can not always be said that it is possible to deprive the liquid crystal display device 3600 of gaze only by simply positioning the decoration on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. For example, even if the face drive unit 3210 or the shoulder drive unit 3220 is used as such a decorative object, as described above, these decorative objects, even when the specific movable effect is not performed, the player is on the side And because the existence can be easily grasped by looking from the upper side (see FIG. 120 (b)), such a known decoration is placed on the front side of the liquid crystal display 3600. Even if the player is positioned, it can not be said that the effect of attracting the player's gaze can be achieved.

  In this respect, as described above, the rear end decorative object unit 3700 according to this embodiment is not only the liquid crystal display device 3600 but also the liquid crystal display device 3600 when it is positioned behind the liquid crystal display device 3600. Has a structure in which the presence is concealed even by different members (the rear wall 3312 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630), and the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 having such high confidentiality, By moving it to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, it is expected that the player's gaze will be taken more surely from the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  In the specific movable effect according to this embodiment, after taking a look at such a movable decorative portion 3710 (see FIG. 125), the movable decorative portion 3710 is up to that point (FIGS. 121 and 123). By creating an entirely different form of decoration (the body of the robot) with a decorative surface different from the reference), it is possible to further gather the player's gaze (see FIG. 127). Then, after this, a known decoration (face drive unit 3210, shoulder drive unit 3220) approaches the movable decoration unit 3710 where the player's gaze is gathered, and thus creates one decoration (robot). Then, from the appearance of the movable decorative portion 3710 to the generation of one decoration (robot), it is possible to collect the player's gaze and entertain it.

  Although the liquid crystal display device 3600 according to this embodiment is configured to include the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, the rear end decorative object unit 3700 includes the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610. It may be disposed on the rear side of at least one of the liquid crystal display devices 3620. However, if display effects appear on any of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a state where the movable decorative portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 has moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, It is desirable that the movable decorative portion 3710 be positioned so as to overlap with both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a front view in order to more reliably take the gaze from the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  At this time, one of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is one decoration (robot) produced by the movable decoration portion 3710 and the known decoration (face drive portion 3210, shoulder drive portion 3220). It is desirable to make the liquid crystal display 3600 appear with a larger area in front view than the heel in order to more reliably take the gaze from the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  Further, the movable decorative portion 3710 (or one decoration (robot)) is positioned so as to straddle both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in this manner, thereby the upper liquid crystal display device Even in the case where the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is separated from the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that linked display effects are performed between them.

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, the movable decorative portion 3710 or one decoration (robot) positioned so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is caused to emit light. The effect of linking the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the decoration connecting them together is the effect of linking the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a separated state It is more desirable to realize At this time, a part of the movable decorative portion 3710 or one decoration (robot) located between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is made to emit light in a separated state It is more desirable to realize the effect linked by the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 which are in the above. It is more desirable for the light emitting part itself to be positioned across the upper liquid crystal display 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display 3620 in a separated state.

  Further, as a coordinated effect realized by the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in such a separated state and a decorative object (movable decorative portion 3710) connecting these, for example, the upper liquid crystal display device It is possible to realize as an effect that one decoration appears by the effect image displayed on 3610, the decorative object (movable decoration portion 3710) which is the substance, and the effect image displayed on the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 It is.

  Further, in the specific movable effect according to this embodiment, as described above, the liquid crystal positioned on the front side of the rear end decorative portion 3708 among the liquid crystal display device 3600, the movable decorative portion 3710, and the rear end decorative portion 3708. The movable decorative portion 3710 disposed so as to be hidden behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 by moving the display device 3600 and the movable decorative portion 3710 is the distance in the depth direction between the movable decorative portion 3710 and the rear end decorative portion 3708 By jumping out to a region on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 so as to widen, the decorative shape of the movable decorative portion 3710 and the rear end decorative portion 3708 on the rear side can be viewed from the front side It will be. In this way, after expanding the rendering space in the depth direction, the player's gaze gradually in the depth direction as multiple rendering by the movable decorative portion 3710 and the rear end decorative portion 3708 arranged to be hidden in the depth direction. By making it possible to achieve the progress of presentation (1st progress, 2nd progress, 3rd progress, 4th progress) that directs A drop in gaming interest can be suppressed. In addition, the effect using the forward movement of the movable decorative portion 3710 extends in the depth direction not only to the area on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 but extending to the area on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 In this way, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  In the specific movable effect according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, a front decoration (face drive unit 3210, shoulder drive unit 3220) positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, and a liquid crystal display Between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 when a predetermined decoration effect (the appearance of a robot) is performed with the rear side decoration (movable decoration portion 3710) positioned behind the device 3600 Although the rendering space is made visible, other decorative objects provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 may be moved to the front side of the rendering space to make it difficult to view.

  In order to realize the effect of moving the movable decorative portion 3710 on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, the liquid crystal display device 3600 may not necessarily be movable. For example, the movable decorative portion 3710 on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 may be moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 by moving so as to wrap around from the side of the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the drive mechanism (guide rod 3413, guide shaft 3443, etc.) of the main liquid crystal display 3600 (upper liquid crystal display 3610 and lower liquid crystal display 3620) in the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 It is decided to provide a mounting portion (mounting hole etc.) for mounting the front movable character unit 3200 on the front side of the standing wall 3312 while concealing by 3312 (while making it difficult for the player to see in front view) . According to such a configuration, two functions of concealing the drive mechanism and the attachment function of the front movable character unit 3200 are realized by the rear erection wall 3312, and the space in the depth direction is not wasted, and the liquid crystal It can be avoided that the drive mechanism of the rear movable unit is visually recognized at the peripheral edge.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the drive mechanism of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device 3620) is on the side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (approximately the same depth as the main liquid crystal in the depth direction). Liquid crystal drive unit 3400 disposed at the side position), and for moving the liquid crystal frame portions of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and these liquid crystal devices forward of the liquid crystal unit 3400. A back box 3010 having a rear wall 3312 for concealing the liquid crystal frame portion and the driving mechanism (for making it difficult for the player to see from the front view) is provided so as to straddle the driving mechanism. This makes it possible to prevent a large difference in level between the main liquid crystal display device 3600 and the drive mechanism of the main liquid crystal display device 3600, and simplifies the concealed structure by the rear wall 3312 of the back box 3010. (The back erection wall 3312 can be made into a substantially wall shape with less unevenness).

 Furthermore, in this embodiment, the drive mechanism on the side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 is provided from the front side to the rear side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (over the thickness of the liquid crystal), and thus the main liquid crystal display Providing the drive mechanism by fully utilizing the space on the side of the device 3600 makes it possible to provide such a large drive mechanism (and consequently the large liquid crystal drive unit 3400) without wasting space in the depth direction.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 96, 100 and 101, it is communicated with the receiving port (for example, the starting port etc.) in the right-handed game area 2540 and entered the receiving port. The right guideway 3250, which is at least a part of the discharge passage for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine, is integrally formed with the right rail portion 3240 that constitutes the drive mechanism of the full burst drive unit 3230 of the front movable unit 3200. It is provided. According to such a configuration, the drive mechanism of the front side character unit 3200 is also used as the discharge passage, so the back side space can be effectively used. In addition, a support member for supporting the full burst drive unit 3230 (the right rail portion 3240 in this embodiment), such a support member is fixedly fixed to the base member (back box 3010) for stable driving of the movable part. Since the discharge passage is formed in the above, the influence of vibration etc. when the movable part is driven can be suppressed by the rigidity of the fixedly fixed supporting member and the ball can be stably guided.

In this embodiment, while the stepped portion 3315 is formed corresponding to the portion corresponding to the movable range of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is allowed to move by the rear wall 3312. Although the drive mechanism is suitably concealed, the step portion 3315 may have a function of restricting the movable range of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. That is, although the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is moved by the drive of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 as described above, both the initial position when the unit is not driven and the maximum drive position when driven are stepped portions 3315. It may be regulated according to or only one of them may be regulated. In particular, when the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 is not driven, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 function as concealment of the gap between the two display devices and the frame portion so as to be recognized as one display device. As for the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, it is extremely important to suppress this positional deviation, since the positional deviation thereof reduces the interest of the player. For this reason, it is extremely effective in suppressing the decrease in interest that at least the position of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 when the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 is not driven is naturally restricted by the step portion 3315.
In this embodiment, the rear wall 3012 of the back box 3010 is shaped to surround the main liquid crystal display 3600. For example, the back wall 3012 may be erected only on one side of the main liquid crystal display 3600. It may be provided in the form of or may be provided in the form of being erected on both the left and right sides, the upper and lower sides, and the erecting position thereof is not limited. In addition, for example, when the rear erection wall 3312 is provided so as to be erected only on one side, the drive mechanism on the side of the liquid crystal also conforms to the rear erection wall 3312 and only to one side of the main liquid crystal display 3600 It will be arranged.

  Further, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is movable in front of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device 3620) by a drive mechanism provided on the side of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. Although the display is always located in front of the display, it is located between the upper liquid crystal display 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display 3620 and does not have a function of concealing a gap or a frame portion of these displays. When it is grasped as a movable movable decorative member, the following mode may be adopted.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the movable decorative member (liquid crystal decorative member 3630), which was supposed to be positioned in front of the display even when not driven, is positioned behind the above-mentioned rear wall 3312 when not driven. It may be hidden along with the drive mechanism, and may appear from the rear of the rear wall 3312 to the front of the main liquid crystal display 3600 at the time of driving. Such a movable decorative member appearing in front of the display device is conventionally disposed on the front side of the display device including its drive mechanism, whereas according to this example, the drive mechanism is the side of the display device (display device Not only right beside the screen, but may be positioned further to the back than the display in the depth direction), so a movable decorative member is realized that effectively utilizes the space in the depth direction by utilizing the thickness of the display can do. In addition, the drive mechanism on the side of the display device and the movable decoration member (corresponding to the liquid crystal decoration member 3630) that can be driven by the drive mechanism are unitized with the display device to form a movable decoration member appearing in front of the display device. A new form of display device unit can be realized.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the pressing portion 3418 and the plate-like member 3450 are pressed or released by the liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 being moved closer to or away from each other. This was adopted as the mechanism of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. According to such a configuration, as the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 move away from each other, the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 becomes the plate member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440. The lower drive mode of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 is not changed at all when it is displaced in the pressing range and when it is displaced in the range where the pressing portion 3418 does not abut on the plate member 3450 Nevertheless (in spite of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 maintaining only the drive control for moving the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 downward at a predetermined speed), the moving speed of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is stepwise In order to change the moving speed of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the liquid crystal decorative member It was able to achieve a gradual change in velocity of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is provided so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower display liquid crystal device 3620. According to such a configuration, the control of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower display liquid crystal device 3620 may be shifted, or bounce may occur due to physical interference with each other, or the like. Even if an unintended gap is generated between the lower display liquid crystal device 3620 and the lower display liquid crystal device 3620, this can be suitably concealed. However, when the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is sufficiently overlaid on the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 so as to conceal this gap, the movable character (rear end decoration unit 3700 (rear end) of the liquid crystal display device 3600 When moving the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 to form the rendering space of the body drive section)), it takes much time. Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the relationship between the pressing portion 3418 and the plate member 3450 is adjusted so that the speed can be increased at least in the entire area overlapping the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. Until the movable character (rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit)) behind the liquid crystal display 3600 appears despite the upper liquid crystal drive unit and the lower liquid crystal drive unit operating. It is suitably suppressed that it takes a long time. In this embodiment, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is overlapped with the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, but it does not have to be overlapped, and the movable character (rear end decoration unit 3700 (body) of the liquid crystal display device 3600 The drive unit may only overlap all or part of the gap so as not to be seen from the gap between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower display liquid crystal device 3620 in a front view.

  In this embodiment, as described above, after the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved in the specific direction (forward direction) by the forward drive motor 3720, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved forward by the driving force from the united drive motor 3730a, b. At the time of displacement, the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced in a direction (backward direction) opposite to the specific direction by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720, whereby the movable decorative portion 3710 exceeds expectations. The movement of the movable part can be performed not only in the depth direction (forward direction, backward direction) but also in other directions, for example, It may be in the height direction or in the lateral direction. In this case, unlike the depth direction, the player can easily see the motion in the direction opposite to the specific direction, so it is difficult to expect a rendering beyond expectation, but a limited effect space (a liquid crystal It is no different from the fact that it is possible to realize an effect that is difficult to realize in the front space. In order to make it difficult for the player to see the movement in the direction opposite to the specific direction, the movable decorative portion 3710 is made to emit light during the movement in the direction opposite to the specific direction and the player is made to emit light. You may do something like gathering your attention. Further, the specific direction and the direction opposite to the specific direction may not necessarily be the direction deviated by 180 degrees, and if the directional component is included, the above-described effects can be obtained. Further, in this embodiment, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved forward by the rotation operation by the driving force from the combination drive motors 3730a and 3b. The operation of can also be adopted.

  In this embodiment, as described above, after moving the movable decorative portion 3710 in the specific direction (forward direction) by the forward drive motor 3720, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved forward by the driving force from the united drive motor 3730a, b. Although the effect pattern is shown in which the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced in the direction (backward direction) opposite to the specific direction by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720 when displaced. To adopt a special effect pattern in which the forward motion drive motor 3720 and the combined drive motor 3730a, b move simultaneously in the forward direction so that the movable decorative portion 3710 appears without moving in the direction (backward direction) opposite to the direction. You may In this case, the combined drive by the combined drive motors 3730a, b is not performed without the effect of moving the combined drive motors 3730a, 3b after moving the movable decorative portion 3710 in the specific direction (forward direction) by the forward drive motor 3720. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the combination determination pattern, and the player can be made to pay more attention to the effect when the degree of expectation of the combination effect is high.

  Also, an effect pattern may be adopted in which only the forward drive motor 3720 moves alone and the combined drive motors 3730a and b do not move. In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b move to lead to a combined effect. Furthermore, it can not be said that the operation of the combination drive motor 3730a, b is performed from the relationship with the limitation of “A” described above by moving only the forward drive motor 3720 alone to the maximum position (combination drive motor 3730a, It may be made to function as an effect (a disappointing effect) as if to crush a space in which b can operate. Also, after this denial, the united drive motor 3730a, b may move to adopt a revival pattern that leads to united effect, and if it is developed to united effect by this revival pattern, the expectation is higher than the united decision pattern. May be

  Also, an effect pattern may be adopted in which only the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b move independently and the forward drive motor 3720 does not move. In this case, by providing a single movable effect pattern (a pattern in which only the combined drive motor 3730a, b moves, a pattern in which only the forward drive motor 3720 moves), when both drive sources are driven, they fit within the space. It is preferable to make the player remember the feeling that it will not go wrong. In addition, it is possible to realize a thrilling effect that the movable decorative portion 3710 may hit the glass of the front of the gaming machine beyond the limited space (the space in front of the liquid crystal) by the feature.

  In this embodiment, as described above, each movable decorative portion 3710a to 3710d is separated from the state in which each movable decorative portion 3710a to 3710d forms a specific decoration (the state in FIGS. 113 and 117) to temporarily set the specific decoration. Each is positioned in such a way that it does not break down and no decoration appears (the state of FIG. 118). Then, after that, the movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d are combined on a different surface from when creating the above-mentioned specific decoration, thereby newly forming the decoration having a larger shape in front view than the above-mentioned specific decoration It was decided to perform the production to produce (the state of FIG. 119). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reverse the prejudice that it is a feature that forms a specific decoration at the time of its initial appearance, and to create a new decoration different from this, without returning to the specific decoration. It will be possible to provide feature presentation beyond the expectations of the person.

  In this embodiment, although the movable decoration portions 3710a to 3710d are combined again to generate a new decoration after being separated once from the state of forming the specific decoration, but after being separated once, Movable decorative parts 3710a to 3710d may be combined with, for example, other movable decorative members provided in front of the liquid crystal, the decoration of the center part, etc. to generate a new decoration (the first decorative , And may be positioned to form a decoration with a second decoration, and may be positioned to form a decoration with a third decoration). In this case as well, the player's expectation is that it reverses the prejudice that it is a feature that forms a particular decoration at the time of its initial appearance, and a different decoration will be newly created without returning to the particular decoration. It will be possible to provide feature presentation that exceeds. Then, by combining this with the above embodiment, for example, after temporarily separating from the state of forming a specific decoration, each movable decorative portion 3710a to 3710d is different from the one when producing the above specific decoration. Whether to combine in a plane to create a new decoration, or in combination with other movable decoration members or decorations of a center piece to create a new decoration, depending on the jackpot expectation By doing this, the player can watch the game while paying attention to which way to go.

  In this embodiment, as described above, it is in the standby position (original position) at the rear of the main liquid crystal display 3600 as it is in a specific decorative form (in the embodiment, a design that is a symbol of a team). According to such a configuration, the appearance of the movable aspect can be generated from the appearance of the movable decorative portion 3710. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the movable decorative portion 3710 is exposed by the movement of the liquid crystal display device, the movable body itself does not have to be operated, and a specific decoration can be made to appear.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, in the state of the specific decoration shape (state of FIG. 113), the effect space generated in the depth direction by the movement of the liquid crystal display device can be moved in the depth direction. On the other hand, when a specific decoration is broken and a new decoration is generated (the state of a fuselage character, for example, the state of FIG. 119), the effect space generated in the depth direction by the movement of the liquid crystal display device is It has a larger decorative shape that can not move in the direction. As a result, the movable range of the liquid crystal display device and the arrangement space of the liquid crystal back can be suppressed with respect to the required shape of the movable part at the time of presentation, and the liquid crystal display at the time of the movable It will be possible to realize the feature presentation relatively large without sacrificing the presentation significantly.

  Further, with regard to the movable decorative portion 3710, in the state (the state of the robot trunk portion, the state of FIG. 119) in which the decoration is once broken from the specific decorative state (the state of FIG. 113) and a new decoration is generated Since other movable bodies (the drive unit 3210 and the shoulder drive unit 3220) which are not connected in the state of the shape (the state of FIG. 113) are also connected, the variation and size that can be realized as a feature effect are dramatically improved. become able to.

  Also, in the case of a movable character movable in front of the liquid crystal, it is often arranged at a position behind the center character so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the liquid crystal peripheral portion. Since a part is visually recognized, the feature presentation can be imagined before driving, and there is a possibility that the surprise of the feature presentation can not be sufficiently given. In this respect, in this embodiment, the movable decorative portion 3710 is normally kept waiting behind the invisible liquid crystal display device, and the liquid crystal is moved to appear in front of the liquid crystal during driving to eliminate such a fear. doing. In addition, since the movable decorative portion 3710 appears from the rear of the liquid crystal display device, it is difficult to visually recognize the link mechanism or the like when the movable role is taken out in front of the liquid crystal display device. The player can be given an impression as if the decorative portion 3710 appeared.

  According to this embodiment, as described above, in the state of being installed in the hole, the detent torque of the drive motor is smaller than the downward force of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 due to its own weight. The drive motor and the biasing member are provided such that the combined value of the biasing force by the biasing member (the combined value of the direction component acting in the opposite direction to the own weight) becomes larger or substantially the same. According to such a configuration, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may be stopped at any position in the movable range or the driving force by the drive source may not necessarily be applied. It becomes possible to use a plurality of positions of as the original position (effect stop position).

  Therefore, for example, as the original position of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, a plurality of positions where the jackpot expectation degree is higher as the distance from the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is set are set, and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is positioned at any of the plurality of positions. Depending on the situation, the jackpot expectation developed in the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may be different (eg, at a position away from the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 even if the same effect is displayed) The higher the liquid crystal display 3610 is, the higher the degree of expectation, etc.). As a result, even if the fluctuation time until the result of the jackpot is displayed is long, it is not necessary to drive the drive source for holding the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, and the predetermined position in the movable range can be set to the original position. Can be realized.

  Moreover, about the presentation which used the several position of such a movable range as an original position, you may make it straddle over several fluctuation | variation. For example, the position where the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is disposed is different according to the effect mode covering a plurality of fluctuations, for example, the expectation is a so-called probability fluctuation state as the position of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 with respect to the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 It is also possible to realize a high degree of presentation. The plurality of variations may be from a period of up to 4 variations called so-called look-ahead effect, to a long period of time such as 50 variations. In a situation where it is possible to easily change the original position according to the degree of expectation or the like within the period without requiring driving of the driving source for holding the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. It is possible to realize an effect across a plurality of variations using the position of the movable range as the original position.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, when the game machine is used, if the biasing force of the biasing member does not exert its own weight (horizontally, etc.), it is arranged (for example, placed flat). It is possible to suppress deterioration of the biasing function at least before it is used (automatic deterioration suppression function). In this case, by providing the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 and the biasing member 3412 so that the biasing force of the biasing member 3412 is larger than the detent torque, the weight of the biasing member can be reduced. In the state (e.g., flat placement) in which the H. does not work (e.g., flat), both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 move upward to the upper end in the movable range. In addition, it is good not to employ | adopt the several position of the said movable range as an original position about the specific position (position which moved upward to the upper end) which will be located by an automatic degradation suppression function.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 move in the vertical direction. However, the direction is not limited as long as the vertical movement component is included. As long as the liquid crystal display device is at least self-weighted in the state of being installed in the hole as long as it includes the moving component in the vertical direction, the adjustment can be performed by the detent torque and the biasing force by the biasing member.

  In this embodiment, the liquid crystal is used as an example and the position of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. However, the present invention is not limited to liquid crystal. For example, a dot display, an organic EL display Or the like, and may be a structure such as a decoration other than the display.

  Further, the method of urging the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may be either urging by pulling force or urging by pushing force. Further, when the plurality of positions in the movable range is set as the original position and held at any position in the movable range, a driving force may be applied which contributes so as to remain at the original position.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is in front of the liquid crystal, the movable decorative portion 3710 on the rear side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 appears and is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 I made it. According to such a configuration, the movable decorative portion 3710 on the back is displaced to the front side further than the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 which has been produced in the front row so that the player is not conscious of it as the effect space. The front space not using even the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 in the front row is used, and it is possible to realize the effect beyond expectation, such as "How much will you come to this side".

  Further, in this embodiment, when the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the rendering operation is performed at a position overlapping the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 in a front view. Since the space in the front and back direction is extremely narrow in performing such exchange of the movable part in the front and back direction, it is meaningless unless the relationship between the two arranged in the front and back direction is understood. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the rendering operation is performed at a position overlapping with the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 in front view. However, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize the rendering effect of the movable body (the effect of the three-dimensional movable feature rendering) lined up in the front-rear direction which can not be realized by the liquid crystal display.

  Further, in this embodiment, the movable decorative portion 3710 does not perform the rendering operation normally when the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 performs the rendering operation in front of the liquid crystal, and in special cases the movable decorative portion 3710 is larger than the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 It comes out to the front side, and rendering operation is performed, and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is configured not to perform rendering operation. Even if the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 and the movable decorative portion 3710 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, the movable body positioned behind may be relatively inconspicuous and the effect of the display may be relatively low. By performing the front side of the movable body on the side where the body does not perform rendering operation, it is possible to maximize the rendering effect of the movable bodies arranged in the front-rear direction.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the movable decorative portion 3710 has a narrow movable region on the rear side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 and a frontward side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 to expand the movable region. Accordingly, after the movable decorative portion 3710 emerges from the narrow movable region, when it comes out to the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, it is deformed into a decoration larger than the narrow movable region at the time of appearance. This gives a strong impression of the back and forth movement of the movable decorative portion 3710 that has come out, and can further draw out the rendering effect of the movable bodies aligned in the front and back direction.

  Also, the movable decorative portion 3710 has an effect pattern that appears visibly to the player at the rear position of the liquid crystal display device but does not appear again in front of the liquid crystal display device. May be Thereby, the player can be given the preconception that the movable decorative portion 3710 is on the rear side, and when the movable decorative portion 3710 actually appears and moves to the front side relative to the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, By the preconception of the movable body on the side, the movable decorative portion 3710 can give an impression that it travels a considerable distance from the rear to the front, and it brings out the rendering effect of the movable bodies aligned in the front-rear direction even more Will be able to

  When the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is on the front side, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 moves at a position overlapping with the movable decorative portion 3710 in a front view. Then, after the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is moved to a position not overlapping with the movable decorative portion 3710 in a front view, the movable decorative portion 3710 comes out. Then, the movable decorative portion 3710 moves at the overlapping position on the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 moved to the non-overlapping position. The space behind the liquid crystal can be saved to realize such movement.

  In this embodiment, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 and the movable decorative portion 3710 are interchanged in the depth direction, and the decorative portion coming out on the front side performs the rendering operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After 3710 comes out before the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, a rendering operation may be performed to unite with the liquid crystal decorative member 3630.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, after the movable decorative portion 3710 comes out before the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, other movable bodies (face drive portion 3210, shoulder drive portion 3220) also have their effect space It is made to perform the production | presentation operation | movement which comes out using and it unites with the said movable decoration part 3710. FIG. That is, since the operation control is performed so that the player is not aware that the space before the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is used for effect until the movable decoration portion 3710 comes out to the front, The player is strongly given an impression when the body appears, and a rendering operation can be realized that further enhances the rendering effect of the movable bodies arranged in the front-rear direction.

  In this embodiment, both of the movable decorative portion 3710 and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 are moved and interchanged in the depth direction, but if at least one is moved and the depth direction is interchanged, the same effect as described above is obtained. It can produce an effect.

[6. Control board]
Next, control boards for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to the drawings. The control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, a main control board for performing game control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described, and then, a peripheral control board for performing effect control will be described.

  FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the main control board. The main control board 4100 controls the progress of the game, and includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  The main control MPU 4100 a is a microprocessor including a ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The ROM stores, for example, a main control program that controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on and that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on and controls the game operation.

  The main control input circuit 4100 b receives detection signals from various detection switches. The main control output circuit 4100 c outputs various signals to an external substrate or the like. The main control solenoid drive circuit 4100 d drives various solenoids for the movable part and the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e monitors a sign of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of a predetermined voltage.

  In addition to RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), the main control MPU 4100a also monitors the operation (system) watchdog timer and prevents fraud. The function of etc. is also built in.

  The main control input circuit 4100 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 4100 b does not reset information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100 c includes a main control output circuit 4100 ca with a reset function and a main control output circuit 4100 cb without a reset function. The main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca has a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information into which various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to various input terminals. .

  The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals.

  On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb is based on the information for outputting various signals inputted to various input terminals to an external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal is output from its various output terminals.

  Detection signals from the starting opening switch 3022 and the general winning opening switch 3020, and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. The starting opening switch 3022 is a generic name of a first starting opening switch and a second starting opening switch, and detects gaming balls having entered the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004c, respectively. The general winning opening switch 3020 detects the gaming ball having entered the general winning opening 2104.

  Further, detection signals from the gate switch 2352, the count switch 2110, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 are predetermined inputs of the main control MPU 4100a through the panel relay terminal board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 4100b. Input to the port's input terminal. The gate switch 2352 detects the gaming ball having passed through the gate section 2003. The count switch 2110 detects the gaming ball having entered the big winning opening 2003. The magnetic detection switch 3024 is attached to the back unit 3000 to detect fraud using a magnet.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca. Outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starting opening solenoid (movable piece 2005b driving solenoid) 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 Do.

  Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function from the output terminal of a predetermined output port, whereby the main control output circuit with a reset function 4100ca to the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display Signals are output to various displays via the substrate 1191. Various displays include a first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol display 1186, a first special symbol memory display 1184, a second special symbol memory display 1187, an ordinary symbol display 1189, an ordinary symbol memory display And a game state indicator 1183, and a round indicator 1190.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, thereby a payout control board from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. Various information (game information) is output to 4110. Furthermore, by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100 ca, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100 ca sends a signal (power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e Output).

  In the present embodiment, the non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the starting opening switch 3022, the gate switch 2352 and the count switch 2110, while the general winning opening switch 3020 is used. The contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004c, and the gate passes frequently, so the detection of the game ball by the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 is also frequent. Occur. For this reason, the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 use proximity switches with a long life.

  In addition, when the big hit game state (special game state) which becomes advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2003 is opened and the game ball enters frequently, so the detection of the game ball by the count switch 2110 also occurs frequently. Do. For this reason, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch with a long life. On the other hand, since the game ball does not enter the regular winning opening 2001 frequently, detection by the regular winning opening switch 3020 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening switch 3020.

  The main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function, whereby the payout control board is output from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function. The various commands are transmitted to the 4110 as serial data.

  When the delivery control board 4110 normally completes the reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100. The payer ACK signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of pachinko gaming machine 1 from payout control board 4110 as serial data by main control input circuit 4100b, whereby the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the input terminal.

  When the control MPU 4100a normally completes the reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control output circuit with a reset function and a signal (main payment ACK signal) notifying that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port Output to 4100ca. The main payment ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100 ca to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Then, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The power supply substrate for supplying various voltages to main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. (To describe)). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by this capacitor.

  The various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is the operation signal (RAM) from the operation switch when the operation switch (RAM clear switch) of the payout control board 4110 to be described later is operated within a predetermined period after power on. A clear signal is output from the payout control board 4110. The RAM clear signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100 a via the main control input circuit 4100 b. The main control MPU 4100 a completely erases (clears) the contents of the main control built-in RAM in response to the input of the RAM clear signal.

  Subsequently, a peripheral control board for effect control will be described. FIG. 131 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board. The peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150, a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165, and a volume control volume 4140a.

  The peripheral control unit 4150 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100. In addition, it receives the input information of the operation of the effect operation means such as the upper dish effect button 257 and the like, and controls the effect operation. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and performs detection control of the touch state of the touch panel 246 while a speaker housed in a speaker box provided in the main body frame And the sound control of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker provided in the door frame is performed.

  The RTC control unit 4165 is a timekeeping unit that holds calendar information that specifies a date and time information that specifies an hour, minute, and second. The volume adjustment volume 4140a adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame by turning the knob.

  The peripheral control unit 4150 that performs rendering control is a peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT 4150e" And describe.) And.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150 b controls power-on processing that is executed when power is turned on. In addition, various control programs such as a sub control program that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on and controls the rendering operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data are stored.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c is a variety of information (for example, a liquid crystal display device) to be continued across peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Information for managing schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on 3600 and schedule data defining a light emission mode such as various LEDs is stored.

  The peripheral control SRAM 4150 d stores various information (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing a special effect flag, and the like) continuing over the day. The peripheral control external WDT 4150 e monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 4150 a operates normally.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs Can not hold the stored content. On the other hand, in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d, the content stored as a result of the backup power supply being supplied by the large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”) provided on the power supply substrate It is possible to hold it for about time.

  Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply substrate, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d when the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d can not hold the stored content and loses the content.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150 e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a is out of control, and when the timer is up, the hardware is reset. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a predetermined period (until the timer runs up), a reset is applied. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e by outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, and it is possible to prevent reset.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands from the main control board 4100 are received, control signals are transmitted to various boards for effect control such as the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 based on the received various commands. .

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150 a lamp-drives game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. The signal is transmitted to the lamp driving substrate 4170 from the substrate serial I / O port via the peripheral control output circuit (not shown). In addition, game board side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is peripheral from the motor drive board serial I / O port It transmits to the motor drive board 4180 via a control output circuit.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a is a door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor provided in a door frame, peripheral control output from a frame I / O port for a frame drive amplifier substrate motor The circuit is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral door relay terminal board. Furthermore, door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame from the frame I / O port for frame decoration driving amplifier substrate LED It transmits to a frame decoration drive amplifier board via a peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal board, and a peripheral door relay terminal board.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit, provided in the handle unit 500, and a detection signal from a pressure detection switch for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit Is serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate. Then, the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit, through the peripheral door relay terminal board, the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral control input circuit, and the serial I / O for operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is input to the port.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position etc. of various movable bodies (movable roles) provided on the game board 5, and further, from pressing switches such as effect buttons The detection signal is serialized by a game board serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 or the like. The serialized detection data is input from the game board serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and the system runs away using peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 4150e in combination. It is diagnosed whether it is

[7. Various control processing of main control board]
7-1. Main control side power on process]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a main control program to execute main control side power-on processing. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the main control side power-on process.

  When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 4100a first executes an initialization process (step S10). In the initialization process, the execution condition of the interrupt process is set, and data to be stored in the main control built-in RAM are set according to the activation state of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, in the case of a power failure or momentary power failure, the data stored in the main control built-in RAM is restored based on the game information backed up to restore the state before the power is shut off. On the other hand, when the game machine is powered on at the time of hall opening (when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated) or the like, a RAM clear process is performed to initialize the main control built-in RAM.

  When the initialization process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a power failure advance signal has been detected (step S11). The power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notification when the voltage drops below the power failure notification voltage when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off or when a power failure or an instantaneous stop occurs.

  When the power failure advance notice signal is not detected (the result of step S11 is "No"), the main control MPU 4100a executes non-coincidence random number update processing (step S12). In the non-coincidence random number update process, random numbers not related to the collision judgment (big hit judgment) are updated. The non-falling random number includes, for example, a random number for reach determination, a random number for variable display pattern, a random number for determining a big hit symbol initial value, and a random number for determining a small hit symbol initial value. Thereafter, the non-coincidence random number update process is continuously executed until a power failure notice signal is detected.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a detects a power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 4100a executes a main control side power-off process for protecting the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM (step S12). In the main control side power-off process, first, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited to prevent writing to the main control built-in RAM, thereby protecting the game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, while stopping the output of the drive signal to starting opening solenoid 2105 and the function indicatory unit etc, it calculates the check sum in order to judge the legitimacy of the game information at the time of the power failure restoration, sets the backup flag.

  Pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the main control side power on process is executed by the restoration of power thereafter, and protected by the main control side power off process Based on the game information to restore the state before the power failure.

7-2. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on process (FIG. 132).

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a clears the interrupt flag (step S72). By clearing the interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from its initial value.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. For example, a detection signal from the count switch 2110 that detects gaming balls entering the big winning opening 2103, a detection signal from the starting opening switch 3022 that detects gaming balls entering the starting opening 2101, and fraud using a magnet The detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting the and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs a timer update process of managing time by subtracting the timer interrupt cycle (4 ms) from the set measurement time until it becomes 0 (step S76). For the measurement time in the timer update process, for example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric power symbol control process, the ordinary time determined in the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric power bonus control processing A payout ACK signal indicating that the payout control substrate 4110 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control substrate 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is input, in addition to the variation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display pattern Time (ACK signal input determination time), etc.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a false random number update process (step S78). In the hit random number update process, the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot random number, and the small hit random number are updated.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a winning ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls is created, or a self check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. . Then, the prize ball command and the self check command that have been created are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2103, a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110, or the payout control board 4110 When a payment acknowledgment signal indicating that reception is normally completed is not input within a predetermined time, a self check command is generated to check the connection between the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control substrate 4110, and the payout control substrate 4110 is generated. Send to

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes frame command reception processing (step S82). In the frame command reception process, various commands output from the payout control board 4110 are received.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a fraudulent activity detection process (step S84). In the cheating detection process, an abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the game is not in the big hit gaming state (when the gaming ball enters the big winning opening 2103) Create a prize error display command as an abnormal state.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a special symbol and special electric combination product control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric combination product control processing, it is determined whether the big hit judgment random number matches with the big hit judgment value ("special lottery") or whether the big hit symbol random number is matched with the probability change judgment value or not It is determined (determination of whether or not to generate probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of hitting a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) set higher than that at normal time (low probability). Details of the special symbol and the special motorized prize control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes an ordinary symbol and ordinary electric combination product control process (step S88). In the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric character control process, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the random number per judgment such as the ordinary symbol is extracted. Then, it is determined whether or not the random number for determining the normal symbol matches the normal determination value for the normal symbol ("normal lottery"). Whether or not the movable piece 2106 is operated to open and close is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by normal lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 is expanded in the left and right direction, and the game ball can be accepted to the lower starting opening 2102 and the game state becomes advantageous to the player. It becomes gaming state.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes port output processing (step S90). In the port output process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control program, for example, sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control substrate 4110 when various commands from the payout control substrate 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. Outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid 2108 that opens / closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2103 when it is in a big hit gaming state, or outputs a drive signal to a start opening solenoid 2105 that opens / closes a movable piece 2106 In addition to output, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output information, starting opening Pay out various information (gaming information) signals related to the game such as winning information output signals And outputs to the substrate 4110.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main cycle serial data. The transmission information includes a command for instructing the execution of the effect by the liquid crystal display device or the movable part, and the like, and a command for notifying of a gaming state, occurrence of an error, and the like.

  Finally, the main control MPU 4100a performs register switching (restoration) (step S96), and ends the main control timer interrupt process. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a saves the contents of the general purpose register in the stack area by hardware. This prevents the contents of the general purpose register used in the main control side main processing from being destroyed. In the process of step S96, the contents saved in the stack area are read out and written in the original register. The main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the process of step S96.

7-3. Special symbol and special electric role control processing]
Next, the special symbol and the special motorized symbol control process will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol and the special motorized prize control process. The special symbol and special motorized product control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the special symbol and special electric combination control processing, acceptance of the game ball to starting opening 2101, that is, starting starting winning combination (starting condition establishment), every starting memory information (starting information) where this starting condition is satisfied A jackpot determination random number is acquired, and it is determined whether the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined based on the lottery result whether or not the big hit gaming state (special game state) is to be generated, and the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (predetermined winning condition is established ) In the case, the game mode is shifted from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and the special motorized prize control process will be described according to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special electric combination product control processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening (step S100). If the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening (the result at step S100 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning specification command is set (step S102).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has won in the start winning opening (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won in the start winning opening, the main control by reading the presence or absence of the detection signal from the starting opening switch 3022 in the switch input processing (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) This is performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the built-in RAM.

  When the gaming ball is won in the starting opening 2101 (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing for starting opening winning (step S116). In the start-up winning process, a start-up winning command to be transmitted when the game ball newly wins the start-up is set, or a jackpot determination random number is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, a special symbol The processing etc. for performing pre-reading effect are performed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes the corresponding processing based on the special symbol / electric combination product operation number which is the gaming progress state variable in which the type of the branching process executed according to the progression of the game is designated (step S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the shifted branch process is finished, the special symbol and the special electric bonus game control End the process. In addition, since the value of the game progress state variable and the like stored in the game progress state storage area is the game information, it is backed up in the main control side power-off process.

  In the processing of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as a branch processing, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation processing (step S132), special symbol big hit determination processing (step S134), Special symbol off stop processing (step S136), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), interval processing before big winning opening opening (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step S144) or the special winning opening open end interval process (step S146) is executed.

  In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the fact that the game ball has entered the start winning opening, processing such as starting the variation indication of the special symbol in the special symbol indicator is performed.

  In special symbol variation processing (step S132), processing etc. which control the variation display of a special symbol are performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), it is determined based on the game ball entering the start winning opening whether or not the special symbol which has been fixedly generated causes a big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol out-of-time stop process (step S136), when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped to perform processing such as notifying that. In the special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), when generating the big hit game state, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped and processing etc is notified to that effect.

  In the big winning a prize opening opening interval processing (step S140), the big hit game state is made to occur, processing etc are done for informing that the big hit operation is started. In the special winning opening opening process (step S142), the opening and closing member is opened from the closed state to open the large winning opening with processing such as a big hit operation that the game ball easily enters.

  In the special winning opening closing process (step S144), the opening and closing member is changed from the opened state to the closed state, thereby performing processing relating to the big hit operation in which the game ball is difficult to enter each large winning opening. In the winning opening open end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is finished, a process of notifying that effect is performed.

7-4. Special symbol change waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric symbol combination control processing will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol change waiting process. In the special symbol variation waiting process, the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparation for starting the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the variation of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether the number of special symbol operation pending balls is not zero. In addition, the special symbol operation pending ball number is stored for each starting winning opening when a plurality of starting winning openings are provided. If the variation of the special symbol is not suspended (the result of step S420 is "no"), the variation symbol display of the special symbol is not started, so this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 4100a sets a suspension ball number specification command as command data (step S438).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on the jackpot determination random number acquired at the time of winning opening winning combination or the like.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a executes special symbol variation pattern setting processing (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100 a creates a variation pattern command to be sent to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special figure fluctuation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set as the command value (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as lower order command data (step S458). Furthermore, the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern command according to the fluctuation type is obtained by acquiring the fluctuation type classification value from the fluctuation type classification area (step S460) and adding the fluctuation type classification value to the command value set in the process of step S452. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this manner is stored in a predetermined area.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (step S466). Further, the fluctuation state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

  Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The holding ball number specification command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

7-5. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol variation pattern setting processing.

  The main control MPU 4100a first acquires the number of special symbol operation pending balls (step S530). The special symbol operating pending ball number is stored in the special symbol operating pending ball number buffer. Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets a big hit flag from the big hit flag area (step S538).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a executes a variation pattern selection determination process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol operation pending ball number and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is searched from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a executes a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The variation type type value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a searches for a fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value from the fluctuation time addition value data (step S552). The fluctuation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of times of pseudo run. Then, the main control MPU 4100a adds the fluctuation time addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched in the process of step S546, and acquires the final fluctuation time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electric combination product operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is ended.

7-6. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

  The main control MPU 4100a first acquires a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The fluctuation table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the fluctuation information source table from the fluctuation information source address table. Fluctuation information source table, depending on the gaming state, etc. (per change selection information state table), out (off change selection information state table), reach (reach change selection information state table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability) It is a data table in which table information for referring to the table) and the variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a acquires a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the big hit value (step S350). If the jackpot is won (the result at step S 350 is “yes”), the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type are acquired (step S 354).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a executes a fluctuation information number search process based on the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the big hit variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 4100a acquires the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the big hit fluctuation selection information type table based on the acquired fluctuation information number (step S360).

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a does not win the big hit or the small hit (the result of step S350 is "no"), it determines whether reach is to be generated in the variable display corresponding to the start winning combination (step S372).

  When the reach is not generated in the variable display (result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the random number 1 for fluctuation pattern from the out-of-plane fluctuation selection information suspension table based on the number of reserved spheres (step S 376).

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a acquires random number 1 for fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the state flag, when generating reach in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is “yes”). (Step S382).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a variation information number search process based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the process of step S360, step S378 or step S382 (step S388). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the fluctuation information number search processing, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is acquired from the fluctuation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the fluctuation information number search process is executed based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S 396), and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers: variation pattern random number 1 (step S 386) and variation pattern random number 2 (step S 392). First, the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern group such as ○ system reach) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Furthermore, from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2, a variation pattern (a value set in a variation pattern command) to be finally displayed as a variation is selected. In addition, it is not limited to the method to draw in 2 steps, The system of drawing in 3 or more steps may be sufficient, and you may make it select a fluctuation pattern directly by the random number for one fluctuation pattern.

[8. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIG. 138 and FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of an example of processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

[8-1. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the periphery control MPU 4150a of the periphery control unit 4150 executes the effect control program to perform processing when the periphery control unit is turned on. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an initial setting process (step S1000). In the initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like are performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time taken for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a should be initialized in an extremely short time. Can. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, for example, a command or pachinko relating to control of a game effect output from the main control board 4100 in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command regarding the state of gaming machine 1. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by causing the built-in VDP 4160a to write, for example, "0" in the storage area of the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequently, the effect control program executes current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In the current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour and minute are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a of the RTC control unit 4165, and an RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150 cad is set in the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information, and is set in the time information storage unit as current time information.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control unit steady processing The value is set to 0 when not executing. V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V that is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 4150 a can be received is input from VDP 4160 a with built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the blank signal interrupt process.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (is the value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed.

  When V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, that is, when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed (the result of step S1008 is "YES"), peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG Is set to 1 (step S1009). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being performed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also initialized. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process (FIG. 139).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes lamp data output processing (step S1012). In the lamp data output process, for example, a game board for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 4 created by the lamp data creation process. Output the side light emission data.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In the operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation presence / absence of each operation means is monitored based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. It decides appropriately whether or not to reflect in the game effect.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes display data output processing (step S1016). In the display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source in the display data creation process is processed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display by the built-in VDP 4160a. Output to the device 244.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound created by the sound data creation process, and notification sound and notification sound. .

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a process of executing a scheduler update process (step S1020). In the scheduler update process, schedule data is updated which instructs timing of outputting screen data, light emission data, sound data, drive data of a movable part, and the like. For example, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which screen data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in time series that configures the screen generation schedule data.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the reception command analysis process, various commands received from the main control board 4100 are analyzed in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) (command analysis means). The game state is recognized according to the analysis result of the received command, and the corresponding effect is executed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a warning process (step S1024). In the warning processing, when various commands classified into notification display are included in the command analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022, schedule data for screen generation, light emission mode generation for performing various abnormality notification Schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are set. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. It is supposed to By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an RTC acquired information update process (step S1026). In the RTC acquired information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 are updated. The RTC acquired information update process updates the hour, minute, and second which are time information stored in the time information storage unit, and further, the date which is calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit is updated.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, game board-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates is created.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes display data generation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, screen data to be output to the liquid crystal display device is created. When the generated screen data is input, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and sprite data from the extracted at least one character data The drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated on the built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a sound data creation process (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b are extracted and the built-in sound source is controlled to control the music and effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. While incorporating sound data such as sound, the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes backup processing (step S1034). In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150a are copied to the backup area for backup.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes WDT clear processing (step S1036). In the WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af and the peripheral control external WDT 4 150 e so that the peripheral control MPU 4 150 a is not reset.

  Finally, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to the value 0 (step S1038) as completion of the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), and returns to the processing of step S1006 again. Then, the value of 0 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG for initialization, and the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is executed. The process of step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 is generally set to 30 fps, a V blank signal is input. Interval is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

[8-2. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed every time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power on processing in FIG. 42 will be described. .

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150 a first determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (step S1100). The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 42) and executes the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is this routine. It is a counter that counts the number of times performed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed every about 33.3 ms, so 1 ms in the peripheral control unit steady process 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) After activating the interrupt timer, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times until the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100 (the result of step S1100 is "NO"), that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing as it is.

  On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 (the result of step S1100 is "YES"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN (step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit power-on process, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The number of times will increase by one.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes motor and solenoid driving processing (step S1104). In the motor and solenoid drive processing, of the drive data of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive source such as motor and solenoid arranged in time series. Drive an electrical drive source such as a solenoid.

  Subsequently, the periphery control MPU 4150a executes movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In the movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information, or the like) by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input. Movable position history information etc.) is created. The original positions and movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired from the generated history information.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In the operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, the pressing operation unit 405) by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input. Create operation history information etc. From this history information, it is possible to acquire the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 and the like.

  Finally, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a drawing state acquisition process (S1110). Furthermore, backup processing is executed (step S1112), and this processing is ended. In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150a are copied to the backup area for backup.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the effect is advanced by executing various processes relating to the effect in steps S1104 to S1108 in a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process, the various processes related to the effects in step S1012 to step S1032 are performed in a period of about 33.3 ms to advance the effect. Also, as described above, while the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed once, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is controlled not to be executed 33 times or more by counting the number of execution times STN of 1 ms timer interrupt. Therefore, it is possible to make the progress of the presentation consistent.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires information (judgment result of the jackpot, progress of the current game, etc.) regarding the game from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) while such processing progress is performed, Control concerning various effects is performed based on the acquired information. As control concerning these productions, in the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, making the production pattern according to the fluctuation time decided with the main control board 4100 appear, or special during the big hit game In addition to causing the effect image to appear, any of various decorative objects disposed on the game board 5 (or a plurality of appropriate decorative objects, including the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) And moving any of the decorative objects (or a plurality of appropriate decorative objects).

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment appears a specific effect image across the two display surfaces in the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 as one of the control for various effects. It is possible to perform control to cause the effect, and control to cause different effect images to appear on the two display surfaces.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment executes the above-described specific movable effect or one of various decorative objects during a period in which the specific movable effect is performed, as one of the controls for the various effects. It is possible to cause the movable decorative portion 3710, which is one of the above, to emit light.

  The movable decorative portion 3710 may be provided integrally with the liquid crystal display device 3600.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 pachinko game machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 930 power supply substrate box 940 interface control substrate box 950 payout control substrate box 951 payout control substrate 980 back cover 1000 panel ornament 1001 outer rail 1002 inner rail 1003 Out guidance part 1005 right rail 1006 stopper 1007 backflow prevention member 1111 out port 1183 gaming state indicator 1184 first special symbol memory indicator 1185 first special symbol indicator 1186 second special symbol indicator 1187 second special symbol memory Display unit 1188 Normal symbol memory display unit 1189 Regular symbol display unit 1190 Round display unit 1191 Function display board 1200 Substrate holder 1300 Main control unit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1500 peripheral control unit 1520 peripheral control board box 1610 lower display liquid crystal device 2000 gaming panel 2001 general winning opening 2002 first starting opening 2003 gate section 2004 second starting opening 2005 first large winning opening 2006 second large winning opening 2006 a receiving unit 2006 b Shelf portion 2021 V winning opening 2100 panel board 2101 starting opening 2102 lower starting opening 2103 large winning opening 2104 general winning opening 2105 starting opening solenoid 2106 movable piece 2107 opening / closing member 2108 attachment solenoid 2110 count switch 2112 opening 2113 opening 2122 opening opening 2122 Hole 2123 Warp hole 2200 Starting port unit 2203 Shelf 2205 Decorative plate 2220 Warp entrance 2500 Center character 2510 Center base 2511 francs D part 2522 Warp exit 2523 Taxiway 2530 Stage 2540 Right hitting game area 2541 Right upper circulation space 2542 Route changing member 2545 Decorative member 2547 Gate sensor 2551 Second starting opening sensor 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3050 Warp passage 3100 Back decoration unit 3110 Back decoration unit 3110 Ornamental unit 3120 Back decoration left unit 3130 Back decoration unit 3200 Front feature unit 3210 Face drive part 3210a Left face part 3210b Right face part 3220 Shoulder drive part 3220a Left arm part 3220b Right arm part 3230 Full burst drive part (lower part product)
3250 right guideway 3251 rib 3300 rear side character unit 3310 back box 3315 step 3316 right lower ball passage unit 3320 liquid crystal drive unit 3400 liquid crystal drive unit 3410 upper liquid crystal drive unit 3411 upper liquid crystal holding member 3412 biasing member 3413 guide rod 3414 bearing portion 3415 upper liquid crystal drive motor 3416 rack gear 3418 pressing portion 3420 upper liquid crystal drive gear 3421 upper liquid crystal transmission gear 3421a large diameter transmission gear 3421b small diameter transmission gear 3422 transmission gear 3423 elevation drive gear 3440 lower liquid crystal drive unit 3441 lower liquid crystal holding member 3442 Biasing member 3443 Guide shaft 3444 Bearing 3445 Lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445a Large diameter transmission gear 3446 Rack gear 3450 Plate member 3450 Guide slit 3450b Rack gear 3451 Transmission gear 3480 Liquid crystal storage unit 3480a Upper liquid crystal storage unit 3480b Lower liquid crystal storage unit 3480c Opening 3485 Motor storage unit 3486 Motor storage unit 3600 Liquid crystal display device 3610 Upper liquid crystal display device 3620 Lower liquid crystal display device 3630 Liquid crystal display member 3630 3630a guide portion 3630b rack gear 3631 rotating member 3700 body drive portion 3700a front portion 3701 base portion 3710 movable portion 3710a upper left movable portion 3710b lower left movable portion 3710c upper right movable portion 3710d lower right movable portion 3715 guide rod 3720 forward drive Motor 3721 First rack gear 3722 Second rack gear 3725 Drive gear 3730 Combined drive motor 3734 Drive shaft 3735 Screw gear (worm)
3736 gears (worm wheels)
3738 Rotating gear 4100 Main control board 4110 Payout control board 4140 Peripheral control board

Claims (2)

A gaming machine in which a game is advanced based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Production moving body,
A moving object support portion on which the effect moving object is supported so as to be movable between a first position and a second position;
A biasing member for biasing the effect moving body toward the first position;
It is a force that tends to stay in place when the effect moving body is in a stationary state, and a force that causes the effect moving body to start moving when a force exceeding this force is applied to the effect moving body. Is “A”, the force applied to the first position by the biasing member is “B”, and the force of the direction component against the “B” of the force by the weight of the effect moving body When “C” represents “C”, “B” tends to increase as the effect moving body moves away from the first position and approaches the second position,
The effect moving body is
When the gaming machine is installed in a hall, it can be located anywhere in the middle movable range between the first position and the second position "A> | B-C |" The gaming machine characterized in that the following relationship is established and it is possible to stay on the spot.   The effect moving body is movable by a motor,
  It is a force that tends to stay in place when the effect moving body is in a stationary state, and a force that causes the effect moving body to start moving when a force exceeding this force is applied to the effect moving body. "A", which includes the stationary torque that acts in a state where the coil of the motor is not excited
  The gaming machine according to claim 1.